Self-Regulatory Organizations; Nasdaq MRX, LLC; Notice of Filing and Immediate Effectiveness of Proposed Rule Change To Amend Its Rules in Connection With a Technology Migration to Enhanced Nasdaq Functionality, 61391-61416 [2022-21984]
Download as PDF
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
C. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement on Comments on the
Proposed Rule Change Received From
Members, Participants, or Others
The Exchange neither solicited nor
received comments on the proposed
rule change.
III. Date of Effectiveness of the
Proposed Rule Change and Timing for
Commission Action
The foregoing rule change has become
effective pursuant to Section
19(b)(3)(A)(ii) of the Act 60 and Rule
19b–4(f)(2) 61 thereunder.
At any time within 60 days of the
filing of the proposed rule change, the
Commission summarily may
temporarily suspend such rule change if
it appears to the Commission that such
action is necessary or appropriate in the
public interest, for the protection of
investors, or otherwise in furtherance of
the purposes of the Act. If the
Commission takes such action, the
Commission shall institute proceedings
to determine whether the proposed rule
change should be approved or
disapproved.
IV. Solicitation of Comments
Interested persons are invited to
submit written data, views, and
arguments concerning the foregoing,
including whether the proposed rule
change is consistent with the Act.
Comments may be submitted by any of
the following methods:
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Electronic Comments
• Use the Commission’s internet
comment form (https://www.sec.gov/
rules/sro.shtml); or
• Send an email to rule-comments@
sec.gov. Please include File Number SR–
MEMX–2022–28 on the subject line.
Paper Comments
• Send paper comments in triplicate
to Secretary, Securities and Exchange
Commission, 100 F Street NE,
Washington, DC 20549–1090.
All submissions should refer to File
Number SR–MEMX–2022–28. This file
number should be included on the
subject line if email is used. To help the
Commission process and review your
comments more efficiently, please use
only one method. The Commission will
post all comments on the Commission’s
internet website (https://www.sec.gov/
rules/sro.shtml). Copies of the
submission, all subsequent
amendments, all written statements
with respect to the proposed rule
change that are filed with the
Commission, and all written
communications relating to the
proposed rule change between the
Commission and any person, other than
those that may be withheld from the
public in accordance with the
provisions of 5 U.S.C. 552, will be
available for website viewing and
printing in the Commission’s Public
Reference Room, 100 F Street NE,
Washington, DC 20549 on official
business days between the hours of
10:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. Copies of the
filing also will be available for
inspection and copying at the principal
office of the Exchange. All comments
received will be posted without change.
Persons submitting comments are
cautioned that we do not redact or edit
personal identifying information from
comment submissions. You should
submit only information that you wish
to make available publicly. All
submissions should refer to File
Number SR–MEMX–2022–28 and
should be submitted on or before
November 1, 2022.
For the Commission, by the Division of
Trading and Markets, pursuant to delegated
authority.62
J. Matthew DeLesDernier,
Deputy Secretary.
[FR Doc. 2022–21989 Filed 10–7–22; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 8011–01–P
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE
COMMISSION
[Release No. 34–95982; File No. SR–MRX–
2022–18]
Self-Regulatory Organizations; Nasdaq
MRX, LLC; Notice of Filing and
Immediate Effectiveness of Proposed
Rule Change To Amend Its Rules in
Connection With a Technology
Migration to Enhanced Nasdaq
Functionality
October 4, 2022.
Pursuant to Section 19(b)(1) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934
(‘‘Act’’),1 and Rule 19b–4 thereunder,2
notice is hereby given that on
September 30, 2022, Nasdaq MRX, LLC
(‘‘MRX’’ or ‘‘Exchange’’) filed with the
Securities and Exchange Commission
(‘‘SEC’’ or ‘‘Commission’’) the proposed
rule change as described in Items I, II,
and III, below, which Items have been
prepared by the Exchange. The
Commission is publishing this notice to
solicit comments on the proposed rule
change from interested persons.
62 17
CFR 200.30–3(a)(12).
U.S.C. 78s(b)(1).
2 17 CFR 240.19b–4.
60 15
U.S.C. 78s(b)(3)(A)(ii).
61 17 CFR 240.19b–4(f)(2).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
1 15
Jkt 259001
PO 00000
Frm 00116
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61391
I. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Terms of Substance of
the Proposed Rule Change
The Exchange proposes to amend its
rules in connection with a technology
migration to enhanced Nasdaq, Inc.
(‘‘Nasdaq’’) functionality.
The text of the proposed rule change
is available on the Exchange’s website at
https://listingcenter.nasdaq.com/
rulebook/mrx/rules, at the principal
office of the Exchange, and at the
Commission’s Public Reference Room.
II. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Purpose of, and
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule
Change
In its filing with the Commission, the
Exchange included statements
concerning the purpose of and basis for
the proposed rule change and discussed
any comments it received on the
proposed rule change. The text of these
statements may be examined at the
places specified in Item IV below. The
Exchange has prepared summaries, set
forth in sections A, B, and C below, of
the most significant aspects of such
statements.
A. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Purpose of, and
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule
Change
1. Purpose
In connection with a technology
migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality that will result in higher
performance, scalability, and more
robust architecture, the Exchange
proposes to amend its rules to adopt
certain trading functionality currently
utilized at Nasdaq affiliate options
exchanges. As further discussed below,
the Exchange is proposing to adopt such
functionality substantially in the same
form as currently on the Nasdaq
affiliated options exchanges, while
retaining certain intended differences
between it and its affiliates. The
Exchange also proposes a number of
changes to memorialize existing
functionality, add more granularity in
its rules to describe how existing
functionality operates today, and to
harmonize the Exchange’s rules where
appropriate with the rules of its
affiliated options exchanges by using
consistent language to describe identical
functionality.
The Exchange intends to begin
implementation of the proposed rule
change in Q4 2022. MRX would
commence its implementation with a
limited symbol migration and continue
to migrate symbols over several weeks.
The Exchange will issue an Options
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61392
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Trader Alert to Members to provide
notification of the symbols that will
migrate and the relevant dates.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Routing Changes
In connection with the technology
migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality, the Exchange recently
amended Options 5 (Order Protections
and Locked and Crossed Markets) in
order to harmonize its routing
functionality to that of Nasdaq BX, Inc.
(‘‘BX’’).3 As part of this harmonization,
the Routing Filing included proposals to
adopt or harmonize routing strategies on
the Exchange that are substantially
identical to BX, (i.e., DNR, FIND, and
SRCH), and eliminate existing Exchange
routing functionality that BX does not
offer today (e.g., flash functionality,4
and Sweep Orders 5).
In connection with the proposed
changes in the Routing Filing, the
Exchange now proposes to make
corresponding changes to the following
Rules within Options 3 to account for
the proposed amendments to Options 5:
Section 5 (Entry and Display of SingleLeg Orders), Section 7 (Types of Orders
and Orders and Quote Protocols),
Section 9 (Trading Halts), Section 10
(Priority of Quotes and Orders), and
Section 11 (Auction Mechanisms).6
First, the Exchange proposes to remove
the following rule text in Options 3,
Section 5(b)(1) relating to flash
functionality and Non-Customer order
handling in lieu of using flash
functionality: ‘‘Orders that are not
automatically executed will be handled
as provided in Supplementary Material
.02 to Options 5, Section 2; provided
that Members may specify that a NonCustomer order should instead be
3 Specifically, the Exchange’s affiliate, Nasdaq
ISE, LLC (‘‘ISE’’) amended ISE Options 5, which
MRX Options 5 incorporates by reference. See
Securities Exchange Act Release No. 94897 (May
12, 2022), 87 FR 30294 (May 18, 2022) (SR–ISE–
2022–11) (‘‘Routing Filing’’). As a result, the
amendments to ISE Options 5 in the Routing Filing
also amended MRX Options 5.
4 Today, the Exchange’s flash functionality
permits certain eligible incoming orders to first be
exposed at the National Best Bid or Offer (‘‘NBBO’’)
to all Members for execution at the NBBO price
before that order is routed to another market for
execution. See Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 5, Section 2.
5 A Sweep Order is a limit order that is to be
executed in whole or in part on the Exchange and
the portion not so executed shall be routed
pursuant to Supplementary Material .05 to Options
5, Section 2 to Eligible Exchange(s) for immediate
execution as soon as the order is received by the
Eligible Exchange(s). Any portion not immediately
executed by the Eligible Exchange(s) shall be
canceled. If a Sweep Order is not marketable when
it is submitted to the Exchange, it shall be canceled.
See Options 3, Section 7(s).
6 The Exchange notes that ISE proposed identical
amendments in ISE Options 3 as part of the Routing
Filing.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
accepted and immediately cancelled
automatically by the System 7 at the
time of receipt.’’ With the removal of
flash functionality in the Routing Filing,
the foregoing rule text would no longer
be necessary. In connection with this
change, the Exchange will renumber
current Section 5(b)(2) as (b)(1). Second,
the Exchange proposes to delete similar
flash-related language in Options 3,
Section 5(d) that currently provides:
‘‘Orders that are not automatically
executed will be handled as provided in
Supplementary Material .02 to Options
5, Section 2; provided that Members
may specify that a Non-Customer order
should instead be cancelled
automatically by the System at the time
of receipt.’’
Third, the Exchange proposes to
delete references to do-not-route orders 8
and Sweep Orders in Options 3, Section
7(m) and (s), respectively, and reserve
those Rules. As discussed in the Routing
Filing, the Exchange is eliminating these
order types (and for do-not-route orders,
eliminating as an order type and
describing these instead as a routing
strategy) in order to align with BX’s
current offerings. Fourth, the Exchange
proposes to add a new Supplementary
Material .04 to Options 3, Section 7,
which would set forth the new routing
strategies that are substantially identical
to BX’s current routing strategies, as
further discussed in the Routing Filing.
Specifically, new Supplementary
Material .04 would provide: ‘‘Routing
Strategies. Orders may be entered on the
Exchange with a routing strategy of
FIND or SRCH, or, in the alternative, an
order may be marked Do-Not-Route
(‘‘DNR’’) as provided in Options 5,
Section 4 through FIX only.’’ 9 The
addition of this sentence will make clear
which routing strategies may be utilized
when submitting an order type and will
7 The term ‘‘System’’ means the electronic system
operated by the Exchange that receives and
disseminates quotes, executes orders and reports
transactions. See Options 1, Section (a)(49).
8 A do-not-route order is a market or limit order
that is to be executed in whole or in part on the
Exchange only. Due to prices available on another
options exchange (as provided in Options 5 (Order
Protection; Locked and Crossed Markets)), any
balance of a do-not-route order that cannot be
executed upon entry, or placed on the Exchange’s
limit order book, will be automatically cancelled.
See Options 3, Section 7(m).
9 ‘‘Financial Information eXchange’’ or ‘‘FIX’’ is
an interface that allows Members and their
Sponsored Customers to connect, send, and receive
messages related to orders and auction orders to the
Exchange. Features include the following: (1)
execution messages; (2) order messages; (3) risk
protection triggers and cancel notifications; and (4)
post trade allocation messages. See Supplementary
Material .03(a) to Options 3, Section 7. The
Exchange notes that FIX is the only order entry
protocol on the Exchange that permits routing
today.
PO 00000
Frm 00117
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
provide a citation to the routing rule in
Options 5, Section 4 for ease of
reference.10
Fifth, the Exchange proposes to
amend subparagraph (d)(2) of Options 3,
Section 9. Among other things, this Rule
describes the processing of Market
Orders exposed at the NBBO pursuant
to Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 5, Section 2 after a trading halt.
This rule text is no longer necessary
with the elimination of flash
functionality in the Routing Filing.
Sixth, the Exchange proposes to amend
Options 3, Section 10(a)(ii) 11 to remove
a reference to flash functionality that
will no longer exist with the proposed
changes in the Routing Filing. The
Exchange also proposes to renumber
Options 3, Section 10(a)(i) and (ii) as
Options 3, Section 10(a)(1) and (2) to
conform the numbering in that Rule,
and correct a citation within Section
10(a)(ii) (proposed Section 10(a)(2))
from Options 3, Section 3 to Options 3,
Section 10.
Seventh, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 11(g) 12 to
10 Routing options may be combined with all
available order types and times-in-force (‘‘TIFs’’),
with the exception of orders and TIFs whose terms
are inconsistent with the terms of a particular
routing option.
11 Options 3, Section 10(a)(ii) currently provides
that this rule does not apply to the Block Order
Mechanism described within Options 3, Section
11(a), the Facilitation Mechanism described within
Options 3, Section 11(b), the Solicited Order
Mechanism described within Options 3, Section
11(d), the Price Improvement Mechanism described
within Options 3, Section 13, orders described
within Options 3, Section 12 or an exposure period
as provided in Options 5, Section 2 at
Supplementary Material .02, unless Options 3,
Section 3 is specifically referenced within MRX
Rules applicable to the aforementioned
functionality.
12 Options 3, Section 11(g) currently provides that
an auction in the Block Order Mechanism at
Options 3, Section 11(a), Facilitation Mechanism at
Options 3, Section 11(b), Solicited Order
Mechanism at Options 3, Section 11(d), or Price
Improvement Mechanism at Options 3, Section
13(d), respectively, or an exposure period as
provided in Supplementary Material .02 to Options
5, Section 2, for an option series may occur
concurrently with a Complex Order Exposure
Auction at Supplementary Material .01 to Options
3, Section 14, Complex Facilitation Auction at
Options 3, Section 11(c), Complex Solicited Order
Auction at Options 3, Section 11(e), or Complex
Price Improvement Mechanism auction at Options
11, Section 13(e), respectively, for a Complex Order
that includes that series. To the extent that there are
concurrent Complex Order and single leg auctions
involving a specific option series, each auction will
be processed sequentially based on the time the
auction commenced. At the time an auction
concludes, including when it concludes early, the
auction will be processed pursuant to Options 3,
Section 11(a), (b), (d), or Section 13(a) or
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 5, Section
2, as applicable, for the single option, or pursuant
to Supplementary Material .01 to Options 3, Section
14, Options 3, Section 11(c), 11(e), Options 3,
Section 13(e), as applicable, for the Complex Order,
except as provided for at Options 3, Section
13(e)(4)(vi).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
remove references to the flash
functionality, which will no longer exist
with the proposed changes in the
Routing Filing. Eighth, the Exchange
proposes to amend its Pricing Schedule
at Options 7 to remove all references to
pricing related to the flash functionality.
In particular, the Exchange proposes to
delete the definition of Flash Order in
Options 7, Section 1 and to delete the
language in Options 7, Section 5.B that
currently provides that marketing fees
are waived for Flash Order responses.
enter, modify, or cancel quotes. Bulk
messages are handled by the System in
the same manner as it handles a single
quote message.
The Exchange notes that other
exchanges like Cboe Options Exchange
(‘‘Cboe’’) currently offer similar bulk
messaging functionality that allow their
market participants to submit block
quantity quotes in a single electronic
message.16
Bulk Message
The Exchange proposes to codify
existing functionality that allows Market
Makers to submit their quotes to the
Exchange in block quantities as a single
bulk message. In other words, a Market
Maker may submit a single message to
the Exchange, which may contain bids
and offers in multiple series. The
Exchange does not permit bulk
messaging for orders today. The
Exchange has historically provided
Market Makers with information
regarding bulk messaging in its publicly
available technical specifications.13 To
promote greater transparency, the
Exchange is seeking to codify this
functionality in its rulebook.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 4(b)(3) to
memorialize that quotes may be
submitted as a bulk message. The
Exchange also proposes to add a
definition of ‘‘bulk message’’ in new
subparagraph (i) of Options 3, Section
4(b)(3), which will provide that a bulk
message means a single electronic
message submitted by a Market Maker to
the Exchange which may contain a
specified number of quotations as
designated by the Exchange.14 The bulk
message, submitted via SQF,15 may
The Exchange proposes to make
several enhancements to certain order
types in Options 3, Section 7 in
connection with the technology
migration to Nasdaq enhanced
functionality. Specifically in connection
with the migration, the Exchange
proposes to: (1) introduce an intra-day
cancel timer feature for Market Orders,17
(2) eliminate non-Immediate-or-Cancel
(‘‘IOC’’) 18 Intermarket Sweep Orders
(‘‘ISOs’’),19 (3) introduce BX-like repricing to Add Liquidity Orders
(‘‘ALOs’’),20 and (4) allow Market
Orders to be entered as Opening Only
13 See https://www.nasdaq.com/MRX_SQF
(specifying for bulk quoting of up to 200 quotes per
quote block message). The specifications note in
other places the manner in which a Member can
send such quote block messages.
14 See id. As noted above, quote bulk messages
can presently contain up to 200 quotes per message.
This is the maximum amount that is permitted in
a bulk message. The Exchange would announce any
change to these specifications in an Options
Technical Update distributed to all Members.
15 ‘‘Specialized Quote Feed’’ or ‘‘SQF’’ is an
interface that allows Market Makers to connect,
send, and receive messages related to quotes,
Immediate-or-Cancel Orders, and auction responses
to the Exchange. Features include the following: (1)
options symbol directory messages (e.g., underlying
and complex instruments); (2) system event
messages (e.g., start of trading hours messages and
start of opening); (3) trading action messages (e.g.,
halts and resumes); (4) execution messages; (5)
quote messages; (6) Immediate-or-Cancel Order
messages; (7) risk protection triggers and purge
notifications; (8) opening imbalance messages; (9)
auction notifications; and (10) auction responses.
The SQF Purge Interface only receives and notifies
of purge requests from the Market Maker. Market
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Order Types
Makers may only enter interest into SQF in their
assigned options series. See Supplementary
Material .03(c) to Options 3, Section 7.
16 See definition of ‘‘bulk message’’ in Cboe Rule
1.1. Unlike Cboe, which also allows bulk messaging
for orders, the Exchange’s bulk message
functionality only applies to quotes as discussed
above.
17 A market order is an order to buy or sell a
stated number of options contracts that is to be
executed at the best price obtainable when the order
reaches the Exchange. See Options 3, Section 7(a).
18 An IOC order must be executed in whole or in
part upon receipt. Any portion not so executed is
to be treated as cancelled. See Options 3, Section
7(b)(3). As discussed later in this filing, the
Exchange will relocate the IOC rule into
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3, Section
7.
19 An ISO is a limit order that meets the
requirements of Options 5, Section 1(h). See
Options 3, Section 7(b)(5).
20 An Add Liquidity Order is a limit order that
is to be executed in whole or in part on the
Exchange (i) only after being displayed on the
Exchange’s limit order book; and (ii) without
routing any portion of the order to another market
center. Members may specify whether an Add
Liquidity Order shall be cancelled or re-priced to
the minimum price variation above the national
best bid price (for sell orders) or below the national
best offer price (for buy orders) if, at the time of
entry, the order (i) is executable on the Exchange;
or (ii) the order is not executable on the Exchange,
but would lock or cross the national best bid or
offer. If at the time of entry, an Add Liquidity Order
would lock or cross one or more non-displayed
orders on the Exchange, the Add Liquidity Order
shall be cancelled or re-priced to the minimum
price variation above the best non-displayed bid
price (for sell orders) or below the best nondisplayed offer price (for buy orders). An Add
Liquidity Order will only be re-priced once and will
be executed at the re-priced price. An Add
Liquidity Order will be ranked in the Exchange’s
limit order book in accordance with Options 3,
Section 10. See Options 3, Section 7(n).
PO 00000
Frm 00118
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61393
(‘‘OPG’’) 21 orders (currently only
allowed for Limit Orders).22 As
discussed below, the proposed
enhancements are intended to align
with existing BX functionality. The
Exchange also proposes to add more
granularity on how certain order types
currently operate on the Exchange
today, codify existing order type
functionality, and to relocate related
rule text within Options 3, Section 7 for
better readability. Except with respect to
the order type enhancements specified
above, none of the proposed order type
rule changes will amend current
functionality. Rather, these changes are
designed to bring greater transparency
as to the applicability of certain order
types currently available on the
Exchange, and to provide greater
consistency between the rules of the
Exchange and its affiliates.
Market Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend the
definition of Market Orders in Options
3, Section 7(a) to introduce a cancel
timer feature, which will allow
Members to designate Market Orders
that do not execute after a certain period
of time to be cancelled back to the
Member. Specifically, the Exchange
proposes to add that Members can
designate their Market Orders not
executed after a pre-established period
of time, as established by the
Exchange,23 will be cancelled back to
the Member, once an options series has
opened for trading. BX currently has an
identical timer feature for BX Market
Orders.24 Similar to BX, the proposed
timer would be available once the intraday trading session begins for an
options series, as the Exchange already
has a separate opening delay timer that
provides protection to the market during
the Opening Process. In particular, the
Exchange would cancel or route orders
(consistent with the Member’s
instructions) if an options series has not
opened before the conclusion of the
opening delay timer.25 As such, the
21 An OPG order is a Limit Order that can be
entered for the opening rotation only. See Options
3, Section 7(o). As discussed later in this filing, the
Exchange will relocate the OPG rule into
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3, Section
7.
22 A Limit Order is an order to buy or sell a stated
number of options contracts at a specified price or
better. See Options 3, Section 7(b).
23 The Exchange will initially set the preestablished period of time at 4 seconds, identical to
BX. This specification will be set out in the MRX
system settings document on a publicly available
website. The Exchange would issue an Options
Trader Alert notifying all Members if it determined
to amend that timeframe.
24 See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5).
25 See Options 3, Section 8(k).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61394
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Exchange is proposing that the preestablished period of time for the
proposed timer feature would
commence once the intra-day trading
session begins for that options series. In
other words, while the opening process
is on-going, and the intra-day trading
session has not commenced, the preestablished period of time for the
proposed timer feature would not
commence. Further, the Exchange
proposes to note that Market Orders on
the order book would be immediately
cancelled if an options series is halted,
provided the Member designated the
cancellation of Market Orders.26 The
proposed changes are intended to make
clear that in the event there is a Market
Order in a zero bid market with the
Market Order was resting on the order
book, the Member has an option to
designate the cancellation of that Market
Order pursuant to the proposed cancel
timer feature. In this case, those Market
Orders to sell, which were resting on the
order book, would immediately cancel
upon a trading halt instead of waiting
until the end of the pre-established
timer period. BX has identical language
governing its Market Orders today.27
Like BX, the Exchange believes that the
proposed intra-day timer feature will
provide additional flexibility for
Members that wish to cancel
unexecuted Market Orders after a
certain period of time. Lastly, the
Exchange proposes a non-substantive
change to capitalize the term ‘‘market
orders’’ in the first sentence of Options
3, Section 7(a) for consistency with the
proposed rule text.
Intermarket Sweep Orders
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
The Exchange proposes to amend the
ISO rule in Options 3, Section 7(b)(5),
which currently provides that an ISO is
limit order that meets the requirements
of Options 5, Section 1(h).28 As
amended, the ISO rule will provide:
26 Members may make the designation to cancel
their Market Orders through their FIX and OTTO
port settings.
27 See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5).
28 Options 5, Section 1(h) provides that an ISO is
a limit order for an options series that,
simultaneously with the routing of the ISO, one or
more additional ISOs, as necessary, are routed to
execute against the full displayed size of any
Protected Bid, in the case of a limit order to sell,
or any Protected Offer, in the case of a limit order
to buy, for the options series with a price that is
superior to the limit price of the ISO. A Member
may submit an Intermarket Sweep Order to the
Exchange only if it has simultaneously routed one
or more additional Intermarket Sweep Orders to
execute against the full displayed size of any
Protected Bid, in the case of a limit order to sell,
or Protected Offer, in the case of a limit order to
buy, for an options series with a price that is
superior to the limit price of the Intermarket Sweep
Order. An ISO may be either an Immediate-Or-
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
An Intermarket Sweep Order (‘‘ISO’’) is a
limit order that meets the requirements of
Options 5, Section 1(h). Orders submitted to
the Exchange as ISO are not routable and will
ignore the ABBO and trade at allowable
prices on the Exchange. ISOs must have a TIF
designation of IOC. ISOs may not be
submitted during the Opening Process.
The proposed rule text is substantially
similar to BX’s ISO rule in BX Options
3, Section 7(a)(6).29 The Exchange is
also proposing to add that ISOs may not
be submitted during the Opening
Process to reflect current System
handling. The Exchange notes that BX
similarly prohibits the submission of
ISOs before the market opens and
therefore proposes to add a similar level
of detail in the Exchange’s ISO rule.
Other than the stipulation that ISOs
must have a TIF 30 designation of IOC,
the proposed language does not amend
the current ISO functionality but rather
is intended to add more granularity and
more closely align the ISO rule with
BX’s ISO rule. The Exchange does note
that in connection with the system
migration, the Exchange proposes to
amend the current ISO functionality to
only allow ISOs to be entered as IOC.
Today, Options 5, Section 1(h) provides
that an ISO may either be an IOC or an
order that expires on the day it is
entered.31 The Exchange is proposing to
require ISOs to be entered as IOC, which
would cause an ISO to cancel in whole
or in part upon receipt if the ISO does
not execute or does not entirely execute,
because an ISO is generally used when
trying to sweep a price level across
multiple exchanges in an effort to post
the balance of an order without locking
an away market. The Exchange therefore
believes that ISOs have a limited
purpose and should be cancelled if they
do not execute or do not entirely
execute. As noted above, the proposal
will align to current BX functionality
that similarly only allows ISOs to be
entered as IOC on BX.
Cancel Order or an order that expires on the day
it is entered.
29 BX’s ISO rule also currently states that ‘‘ISOs
may be entered on the Order Book or into the
PRISM Mechanism pursuant to Options 3, Section
13(ii)(K).’’ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(6). The
Exchange notes that it intends to file a separate rule
filing to add similar language as BX relating to how
ISOs may be entered on the Exchange.
30 As discussed later in this filing, the Exchange
is proposing to codify the definition of ‘‘Time in
Force’’ or ‘‘TIF’’ to mean the period of time that the
System will hold an order for potential execution.
See proposed Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 3, Section 7.
31 Because MRX Options 5 incorporates ISE
Options 5 by reference, ISE will file a subsequent
ISE rule filing to amend Options 5 to remove the
language in Options 5, Section 1(h) that currently
allows ISOs to be entered as an order that expires
on the day it is entered.
PO 00000
Frm 00119
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
All-or-None Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend the
All-Or-None (‘‘AON’’) Order rule in
Options 3, Section 7(c), which currently
provides that an AON Order is a limit
or market order that is to be executed in
its entirety or not at all, and that an
AON Order may only be entered as an
IOC Order. As amended, the AON rule
will provide:
An All-Or-None (‘‘AON’’) Order is a
limit or market order that is to be
executed in its entirety or not at all. An
AON Order may only be entered as an
Immediate-or-Cancel Order. AON
Orders will only execute against
multiple, aggregated orders if the
executions would occur simultaneously.
AON Orders may not be submitted
during the Opening Process.
With the proposed changes, the
Exchange is not amending current AON
functionality; rather, it is memorializing
current System behavior in a manner
consistent with its affiliates. Today,
AON Orders have a size contingency
(i.e., executed in its entirety at the
entered size or not at all) and must be
IOC. The Exchange is specifying that
AON Orders will execute against
multiple, aggregated orders only if the
executions would occur simultaneously
to ensure that AON Orders are executed
at the specified size while also honoring
the priority of all other orders on the
order book. The Exchange is adopting
this rule text for AON orders to align to
substantially similar language on BX.32
The Exchange notes that the handling
of AONs as described in the proposed
rule text in Options 3, Section 7(c) is
consistent with the Exchange’s
allocation methodology in Options 3,
Section 10. The additional detail makes
clear that because of the size
contingency of AON Orders, those
orders must be satisfied simultaneously
to avoid any priority conflict on the
order book, which considers current
displayed NBBO prices to avoid locked
and crossed markets as well as tradethroughs.
The Exchange is also proposing to add
that AON orders may not be submitted
during the Opening Process to reflect
current System handling. The Exchange
notes that BX similarly prohibits the
submission of AON orders before the
market opens and therefore proposes to
add a similar level of detail in the
Exchange’s AON rule.33
32 See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(4)(A)
(describing Minimum Quantity Orders and AON
Orders as Contingency Orders). Unlike BX, the
Exchange does not currently offer Minimum
Quantity Orders.
33 See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(7).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Stop Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend its
Stop Order rule in Options 3, Section
7(d), which presently provides that a
stop order is an order that becomes a
market order when the stop price is
elected. A stop order to buy is elected
when the option is bid or trades on the
Exchange at, or above, the specified stop
price. A stop order to sell is elected
when the option is offered or trades on
the Exchange at, or below, the specified
stop price. The Exchange now proposes
to add that a Stop Order shall be
cancelled if it is immediately electable
upon receipt. Stop Orders allow
Members increased control and
flexibility over their transactions and
the prices at which they are willing to
execute an order. The purpose of a Stop
Order is to not execute upon entry, and
instead rest in the System until the
market reaches a certain price level, at
which time the order could be executed.
A Stop Order that is immediately
electable upon receipt would therefore
negate the purpose of the Stop Order, so
the Exchange would cancel such orders
today. The Exchange believes that this
ensures Members are able to use Stop
Orders to achieve their intended
purpose. The proposed changes codify
current Stop Order handling and are
intended to better align the Exchange’s
Stop Order rule with that of its affiliate,
Phlx.34
The Exchange also proposes to specify
that Stop Orders may only be entered
through FIX. This is how Stop Orders
are handled today. Because the
Exchange offers two order entry
protocols today (FIX and OTTO),35 the
Exchange believes that adding this
detail will make clear that Stop Orders
are only available to be entered through
one of these order entry protocols and
reduce any potential confusion.
Stop Limit Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend its
Stop Limit Order rule in Options 3,
Section 7(e), which presently provides
that a stop limit order is an order that
becomes a limit order when the stop
34 See
Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4).
to Trade Options’’ or ‘‘OTTO’’ is an
interface that allows Members and their Sponsored
Customers to connect, send, and receive messages
related to orders, auction orders, and auction
responses to the Exchange. Features include the
following: (1) options symbol directory messages
(e.g., underlying and complex instruments); (2)
system event messages (e.g., start of trading hours
messages and start of opening); (3) trading action
messages (e.g., halts and resumes); (4) execution
messages; (5) order messages; (6) risk protection
triggers and cancel notifications; (7) auction
notifications; (8) auction responses; and (9) post
trade allocation messages. See Supplementary
Material .03(b) to Options 3, Section 7.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
35 ‘‘Ouch
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
price is elected. A stop limit order to
buy is elected when the option is bid or
trades on the Exchange at, or above, the
specified stop price. A stop limit order
to sell is elected when the option is
offered or trades on the Exchange at, or
below, the specified stop price. The
Exchange now proposes to add that a
Stop Limit Order shall be cancelled if it
is immediately electable upon receipt.
The Exchange would cancel these
orders today for the same reasons
discussed above for Stop Orders. The
proposed changes codify current Stop
Limit Order handling and are intended
to better align the Exchange’s Stop Limit
Order rule with that of Phlx.36
The Exchange also proposes to specify
that Stop Limit Orders may only be
entered through FIX. This is how Stop
Limit Orders are handled today. For the
same reasons discussed above for Stop
Orders, the Exchange believes that
adding this detail will make clear that
Stop Limit Orders are only available to
be entered through the specified order
entry protocol and reduce any potential
confusion.
Cancel and Replace Orders
The Exchange proposes to relocate the
rule text governing Cancel and Replace
Orders from Supplementary Material .02
to Options 3, Section 7 into Options 3,
Section 7(f). The Exchange also
proposes non-substantive, clarifying
changes to the relocated rule text to
update the incorrect cross-cites therein
to the System’s price or other
reasonability checks. The Exchange also
proposes to amend the following
portion of the rule, which currently
provides: ‘‘The replacement order will
retain the priority of the cancelled
order, if the order posts to the Order
Book, provided the price is not
amended, size is not increased, or in the
case of Reserve Orders,37 size is not
changed.’’ The Exchange proposes to
make clear that in the case of Reserve
Orders, a change in price will also result
in a change of priority for the
replacement order. The Exchange also
proposes to clarify that the reference to
the Reserve Order’s size in this Rule is
referring to both displayed and nondisplayed size. As amended, the rule
will provide: ‘‘The replacement order
will retain the priority of the cancelled
order, if the order posts to the Order
Book, provided the price is not
amended, or size is not increased. In the
case of Reserve Orders, the replacement
order will retain the priority of the
36 See
Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4)(A).
discussed later in this filing, a Reserve
Order is defined in Options 3, Section 7(g) as a
Limit Order that contains both a displayed portion
and a non-displayed portion.
37 As
PO 00000
Frm 00120
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61395
cancelled order, if the order posts to the
Order Book, provided the price is not
amended or size (displayed and nondisplayed) is not changed.’’ The
proposed changes will aid market
participants in locating this order type
in the main body of the rule, and add
more granularity around how the
Exchange will treat the cancellation and
replacement of Reserve Orders.
Reserve Orders
As described in Options 3, Section
7(g), the Exchange offers Members a
Reserve Order, which is a Limit Order
that contains both a displayed portion
and a non-displayed portion. Both the
displayed and non-displayed portions of
a Reserve Order are available for
potential execution against incoming
marketable orders. A non-marketable
Reserve Order will rest on the order
book. The non-displayed portion of a
Reserve Order will be available for
execution only after all displayed
interest at that price has been executed.
Both the displayed and the nondisplayed portions of a Reserve Order
will be ranked initially by the specified
limit price and time of entry, and both
the displayed and non-displayed
portions of a Reserve Order will trade in
accordance with the priority and
allocation provisions in Options 3,
Section 10.
When the displayed portion of a
Reserve Order has been decremented, in
whole or in part, it will be refreshed
from the non-displayed portion of the
resting Reserve Order. If the displayed
portion is refreshed in part, the new
displayed portion will include the
previously displayed portion. Upon any
refresh, the entire displayed portion of
the order will be ranked at the specified
limit price, assigned a new entry time
(i.e., the time that the newly displayed
portion of the order was refreshed), and
given priority in accordance with
Options 3, Section 10. Any remaining
non-displayed portion of the order will
receive the same time stamp as the
newly displayed portion of the order.
The Exchange now proposes to
enhance the Reserve Order rule by
providing more granularity in how
Members may elect to refresh the
display quantity for the Reserve Order.
The Exchange is not proposing to
modify the current functionality of
Reserve Orders, but rather proposes to
augment the definition to clarify current
System behavior. Specifically, the
Exchange proposes to make clear that
Reserve Orders may be entered with an
instruction for the displayed portion of
the order to be refreshed: (A) upon full
execution of the displayed portion or
upon any partial execution; and (B) up
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61396
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
to the initial size of the displayed
portion or with a random refresh
quantity within a range determined by
the Member.38 The Exchange believes
that this refresh feature for Reserve
Orders provides more flexibility and
opportunities for Members to add
displayed liquidity to the Exchange. The
Exchange believes that the proposed
changes would add transparency to the
operation of Reserve Orders, without
altering current functionality. The
Exchange notes that other options
exchanges like Cboe currently offer
similar refresh features on their Reserve
Order functionality.39
Finally, the Exchange proposes nonsubstantive, technical changes in
Options 3, Section 7(g) to reformat the
paragraph numbering, make a corrective
change to ‘‘non-displayed portions’’ in
proposed paragraph (6), and update a
cross-cite in proposed paragraph (6).
Attributable Orders
As described in Options 3, Section
7(h), the Exchange currently offers
Attributable Orders, which allow
Members to voluntarily display their
firm IDs on the orders. The rule also
provides the Exchange with flexibility
to announce which Exchange Systems
and class of securities for which the
Attributable Order would be available.40
The Exchange now proposes to delete
existing text that refers to class of
securities in Options 3, Section 7(h).
Attributable Orders are available for all
classes of securities today. The
Exchange is therefore deleting this
language as inaccurate. The Exchange
also proposes a corrective change herein
to ‘‘an Option Trader Alert.’’
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Customer Cross Orders
Customer Cross Orders are currently
defined in Options 3, Section 7(i). The
Exchange proposes to add that such
orders will trade in accordance with
Options 3, Section 12(a). This is a nonsubstantive amendment to add a crossreference to Section 12(a), which
currently describes in detail how a
Customer Cross Order would execute on
the Exchange.
38 See proposed Options 3, Section 7(g)(4). The
Exchange will also renumber the paragraphs within
this rule accordingly. As it relates to the refresh
quantity range, Members must designate a range for
the random refresh election when they submit the
Reserve Order if they elect a random refresh,
otherwise the Reserve Order would be refreshed at
a quantity equal to the initial size of the displayed
portion. The range must be set at a number between
1 and the initial displayed quantity.
39 See Cboe Rule 5.6(c) (setting forth the random
replenishment and fixed replenishment features for
Reserve Orders).
40 Today, Attributable Orders are not available for
the Facilitation, Solicited Order, and Price
Improvement Mechanisms.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Qualified Contingent Cross Orders
Qualified Contingent Cross (‘‘QCC’’)
Orders are currently defined in Options
3, Section 7(j). The Exchange proposes
a non-substantive, technical change to
add a reference to ‘‘QCC’’ in the first
sentence of this rule. The Exchange also
proposes to add that QCC Orders will
trade in accordance with Options 3,
Section 12(c). This is a non-substantive
amendment to add a cross-reference to
Section 12(c), which currently describes
in detail how a QCC Order would
execute on the Exchange.
The Exchange further proposes to
specify that QCC Orders may only be
entered through FIX. This is how QCC
Orders are handled today. Because the
Exchange offers two order entry
protocols today (FIX and OTTO), the
Exchange believes that adding this
detail will make clear that QCC Orders
are only available to be entered through
one of these order entry protocols and
reduce any potential confusion.
Preferenced Orders
The Exchange proposes to include the
following definition of a Preferenced
Order in Options 3, Section 7(l) for ease
of reference: ‘‘A Preferenced Order is as
described in Options 2, Section 10.’’
This is not a new order type, as
Preferenced Orders are currently
described in Options 2, Section 10.
While this order type is not currently
listed in the order type rule in Options
3, Section 7, the Exchange believes that
it will be useful to market participants
to have order types centralized within
one rule. Phlx similarly lists out
Directed Orders (akin to Preferenced
Orders) in its order type rule in Phlx
Options 3, Section 7(b)(11).
Add Liquidity Orders
Add Liquidity Orders (‘‘ALOs’’) are
currently defined in Options 3, Section
7(n). Today, the Exchange offers ALOs
to provide market participants with
greater control over the circumstances
in which their orders are executed.
ALOs are Limit Orders that will only be
executed as a ‘‘maker’’ on the Exchange
(i.e., when the Member is providing
liquidity). Members can choose whether
an ALO that is executable on the
Exchange upon entry (or that is not
executable on the Exchange upon entry,
but locks or crosses the NBBO) will be
cancelled or re-priced to one MPV above
the national best bid (for sell orders) or
below the national best offer (for buy
orders). If at the time of entry, an ALO
would lock or cross one or more nondisplayed orders on the Exchange, the
ALO will be cancelled or re-priced to
one MPV above the best non-displayed
PO 00000
Frm 00121
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
bid price (for sell orders) or below the
best non-displayed offer price (for buy
orders).41 Today, an ALO will only be
re-priced once and will be executed at
the re-priced price. The Exchange notes
that without the ability to re-price an
ALO in the foregoing manner, under
certain circumstances, an incoming
ALO could execute against a displayed
or non-displayed order resting on the
Exchange’s limit order book, which
would be in direct contravention with
the purpose of an ALO (to provide
liquidity, not take liquidity).
As part of a concurrent rule filing, the
Exchange is proposing to adopt a repricing mechanism identical to current
BX re-pricing functionality 42 to avoid
certain orders from locking or crossing
an away market’s price.43 In connection
with the proposed adoption of the BXlike re-pricing mechanism in Options 3,
Section 5(d) in the Re-Pricing Filing, the
Exchange now proposes to make related
changes to the ALO rule in Options 3,
Section 7(n). In particular, the Exchange
proposes that if an ALO would not lock
or cross an order or quote on the System
but would lock or cross the NBBO, the
order will be handled pursuant to
Options 3, Section 5(d), which will set
forth the new BX-like re-pricing
mechanism for non-routable orders.44
As noted in Options 3, Section 7(n),
ALOs are inherently non-routable.
Accordingly, the Exchange is proposing
to handle ALOs in a consistent manner
with the new re-pricing mechanism.
Because the new mechanism will allow
for continuous re-pricing as discussed
above, the Exchange also proposes to
remove the current limitation in the
41 As discussed in more detail below, the
Exchange will amend this sentence to say ‘‘orders
or quotes’’ to codify existing ALO behavior.
42 Today, BX re-prices certain orders to avoid
locking and crossing away markets, consistent with
its Trade-Through compliance and Locked or
Crossed Markets obligations. See BX Options 3,
Section 5(d). See also Securities Exchange Act
Release No. 89476 (August 4, 2020), 85 FR 48274
(August 10, 2020) (SR–BX–2020–017) (describing
BX re-pricing mechanism in BX Options 3, Section
5).
43 See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 95807
(September 16, 2022), 87 FR 57933 (September 22,
2022) (SR–MRX–2022–16) (‘‘Re-Pricing Filing’’).
Specifically in the Re-Pricing Filing, the Exchange
is proposing to adopt the following language in
Options 3, Section 5(d), which will be identical to
BX Options 3, Section 5(d): An order that is
designated by a Member as non-routable will be repriced in order to comply with applicable TradeThrough and Locked and Crossed Markets
restrictions. If, at the time of entry, an order that
the entering party has elected not to make eligible
for routing would cause a locked or crossed market
violation or would cause a trade-through violation,
it will be re-priced to the current national best offer
(for bids) or the current national best bid (for offers)
and displayed at one minimum price variance
above (for offers) or below (for bids) the national
best price.
44 Id.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
ALO rule stipulating that these orders
will only be re-priced once and
executed at the re-priced price. The
proposed order handling for ALOs will
be functionally identical to ALO
handling on BX today.45
The Exchange further proposes a
clarifying change in the ALO rule that
would not amend current system
behavior. The Exchange proposes to add
‘‘or quotes’’ to make clear that if at the
time of entry, an ALO would lock or
cross one or more non-displayed orders
or quotes on the Exchange, the ALO will
be cancelled or re-priced to one MPV
above the best non-displayed bid price
(for sell orders) or below the best nondisplayed offer price (for buy orders).
Finally, the Exchange proposes to add
that ALOs may only be submitted when
an options series is open for trading to
make clear that an ALO would not be
accepted during the Opening Process
when the order book is not available.
The proposed rule text is consistent
with current functionality, so the
Exchange is codifying current ALO
behavior with this change and adding
the same level of detail currently in
BX’s ALO rule.46
As amended, Options 3, Section 7(n)
will provide:
An Add Liquidity Order is a limit order
that is to be executed in whole or in part on
the Exchange (i) only after being displayed
on the Exchange’s limit order book; and (ii)
without routing any portion of the order to
another market center. Members may specify
whether an Add Liquidity Order shall be
cancelled or re-priced to the minimum price
variation above the national best bid price
(for sell orders) or below the national best
offer price (for buy orders) if, at the time of
entry, the order (i) is executable on the
Exchange; or (ii) the order is not executable
on the Exchange, but would lock or cross the
national best bid or offer. If at the time of
entry, an Add Liquidity Order would lock or
cross one or more non-displayed orders or
quotes on the Exchange, the Add Liquidity
Order shall be cancelled or re-priced to the
minimum price variation above the best nondisplayed bid price (for sell orders) or below
the best non-displayed offer price (for buy
orders). Notwithstanding the aforementioned,
if an Add Liquidity Order would not lock or
cross an order or quote on the System but
would lock or cross the NBBO, the order will
be handled pursuant to Options 3, Section
5(d). An Add Liquidity Order will be ranked
in the Exchange’s limit order book in
accordance with Options 3, Section 10. Add
Liquidity Orders may only be submitted
when an options series is open for trading.
45 See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(12). See also
Securities Exchange Act Release No. 93896 (January
4, 2022), 87 FR 1231 (January 10, 2022) (SR–BX–
2021–054), which introduced ALOs on BX.
46 Id.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
QCC With Stock Orders
The Exchange proposes a nonsubstantive change to correct a crosscite in the QCC with Stock Order rule
in Options 3, Section 7(t). The current
citation to Options 3, Section 12(c) in
the description of this order type should
instead be Options 3, Section 12(e).
Opening Sweep
Opening Sweeps are currently defined
in Options 3, Section 7(u) as a Market
Maker order submitted for execution
against eligible interest in the System
during the Opening Process pursuant to
Options 3, Section 8(b)(1). The
Exchange proposes to replace the
current definition with the following:
‘‘An Opening Sweep is a one-sided
order entered by a Market Maker
through SQF for execution against
eligible interest in the System during
the Opening Process. This order type is
not subject to any protections listed in
Options 3, Section 15, except for
Automated Quotation Adjustments. The
Opening Sweep will only participate in
the Opening Process pursuant to
Options 3, Section 8(b)(1) and will be
cancelled upon the open if not
executed.’’
The proposed rule text is consistent
with current functionality, so the
Exchange is providing additional
context to the Opening Sweep as
currently described in Options 3,
Section 8(b) and codifying current
Opening Sweep behavior with this
change. Specifically, because an
Opening Sweep is an IOC order
submitted by a Market Maker during the
Opening Process, the Exchange is
making clear in the proposed rule text
that this order type is entered through
SQF.47 The Exchange is also specifying
that Opening Sweeps are not subject to
any risk protections in Options 3,
Section 15 (except Automated
Quotation Adjustments) because the
Opening Process itself has boundaries
(notably, the Quality Opening Market 48
47 See Supplementary Material .03(c) of Options
3, Section 7, which notes that SQF is an interface
that allows Market Makers to submit IOC orders.
48 A ‘‘Quality Opening Market’’ is a bid/ask
differential applicable to the best bid and offer from
all Valid Width Quotes defined in a table to be
determined by the Exchange and published on the
Exchange’s website. The calculation of Quality
Opening Market is based on the best bid and offer
of Valid Width Quotes. The differential between the
best bid and offer are compared to reach this
determination. The allowable differential, as
determined by the Exchange, takes into account the
type of security (for example, Penny versus nonPenny Interval Program issue), volatility, option
premium, and liquidity. The Quality Opening
Market differential is intended to ensure the price
at which the Exchange opens reflects current
market conditions. See Options 3, Section 8(a)(7).
PO 00000
Frm 00122
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61397
and the Opening Quote Range 49) within
which orders will be executed. As it
relates to the proposed language relating
to Opening Sweep participation in the
Opening Process and cancellation upon
the open, the Exchange notes that this
concept is not new as Opening Sweeps
are already described in Options 3,
Section 8 today and apply only during
the Opening Process. The language
merely provides additional context to
the order type.
The Exchange notes that the Opening
Sweep is functionally identical to the
Opening Sweep on Phlx,50 so the
proposed language will harmonize the
Exchange’s rule with the current Phlx
rule.
Time in Force
Today, the Exchange notes that
certain functionality is described as an
‘‘order type’’ in Options 3, Section 7,
but would be more precisely described
as a TIF attribute that may be added to
a particular order type. Accordingly, the
Exchange proposes to codify the term
‘‘TIF’’ in proposed Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7. The
proposed TIF definition will be
identical to the TIF definition in BX
Options 3, Section 7(b). The Exchange
also proposes to relocate various rules
into Supplementary Material .02 to
centralize the TIFs that are available on
the Exchange today. As proposed, the
rule text will provide:
.02 Time in Force. The term ‘‘Time in
Force’’ or ‘‘TIF’’ shall mean the period of
time that the System will hold an order for
potential execution, and shall include:
(a) Day. An order to buy or sell entered
with a TIF of ‘‘DAY,’’ which, if not executed,
expires at the end of the day on which it was
entered. All orders by their terms are Day
orders unless otherwise specified. Day orders
may be entered through FIX or OTTO.
(b) Good-Till-Canceled. An order to buy or
sell entered with a TIF of ‘‘GTC’’ that remains
in force until the order is filled, canceled or
the option contract expires; provided,
however, that GTC orders will be canceled in
the event of a corporate action that results in
an adjustment to the terms of an option
contract. GTC orders may be entered through
FIX.
(c) Good-Till-Date. An order to buy or sell
entered with a TIF of ‘‘GTD,’’ which, if not
executed, will be cancelled at the sooner of
the end of the expiration date assigned to the
order, or the expiration of the series;
provided, however, that GTD orders will be
canceled in the event of a corporate action
that results in an adjustment to the terms of
an option contract. GTD orders may be
entered through FIX.
49 The Opening Quote Range represents the outer
boundaries at which the Exchange may open. See
Options 3, Section 8(i).
50 See Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(6).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61398
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
(d) Immediate-or-Cancel. An order entered
with a TIF of ‘‘IOC’’ that is to be executed
in whole or in part upon receipt. Any portion
not so executed is to be treated as cancelled.
(1) Orders entered with a TIF of IOC are
not eligible for routing.
(2) IOC orders may be entered through FIX,
OTTO or SQF, provided that an IOC order
entered by a Market Maker through the SQF
protocol will not be subject to the (A) Order
Price Protection, Market Order Spread
Protection, and Size Limitation Protection as
defined in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A),
(1)(B), and (2)(B) respectively, for single leg
orders, or (B) Complex Order Price Protection
as defined in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1) for
Complex Orders.
(3) Block Orders, Facilitation Orders,
Complex Facilitation Orders, SOM Orders,
Complex SOM Orders, PIM Orders, Complex
PIM Orders, QCC Orders, QCC Complex
Orders, Customer Cross Orders, and
Customer Cross Complex Orders are
considered to have a TIF of IOC. By their
terms, these orders will be: (1) executed
either on entry or after an exposure period,
or (2) cancelled.
(e) Opening Only. An Opening Only
(‘‘OPG’’) order is entered with a TIF of
‘‘OPG.’’ This order can only be executed in
the Opening Process pursuant to Options 3,
Section 8. Any portion of the order that is not
executed during the Opening Process is
cancelled. OPG orders may not route. This
order type is not subject to any protections
listed in Options 3, Section 15, except Size
Limitation.
The Exchange is relocating rule text
governing Day orders from Options 3,
Section 7(l) into Supplementary
Material .02(a) to specify that orders
may be entered with a TIF of DAY. The
Exchange also proposes to include
additional detail that Day orders may be
entered through FIX or OTTO. This is
how Day orders operate today, and the
proposed rule text merely adds the same
level of detail currently in BX’s Day
order rule.51
The Exchange is relocating rule text
governing Good-Till-Canceled (‘‘GTC’’)
orders from Options 3, Section 7(r) into
Supplementary Material .02(b) to
specify that orders may be entered with
a TIF of GTC. The Exchange also
proposes to include additional detail
that GTC orders may be entered through
FIX. This articulates current GTC
behavior.
The Exchange is relocating rule text
governing Good-Till-Date (‘‘GTD’’)
orders from Options 3, Section 7(p) into
Supplementary Material .02(c) to
specify that orders may be entered with
a TIF of GTD. The Exchange also
proposes a number of changes that do
not modify current GTD functionality,
but are intended to align to the GTC rule
51 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(3). BX’s rule
does not refer to OTTO because BX does not offer
OTTO functionality today.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
described above. Today, GTC and GTD
orders are intended to be functionally
similar except GTC generally persists
until it is cancelled by the Member and
GTD generally persists until the
assigned date. Accordingly, the
Exchange seeks to add a similar level of
detail to the GTD rule as it is proposing
in the GTC rule above. First, the
Exchange proposes to remove the word
‘‘limit’’ from the relocated GTD rule
text. Similar to GTC orders, GTD orders
can also be sent as Market Orders (in
addition to Limit Orders) today. The
proposed changes will therefore align
the rule text with current functionality.
Second, the Exchange proposes to add
that GTD orders will be canceled in the
event of a corporate action that results
in an adjustment to the terms of an
option contract. This language is copied
from current GTC rule text and
articulates current GTD behavior. Third,
the Exchange proposes to include
additional detail that GTD orders may
be entered through FIX. This mirrors the
proposed changes for GTC orders and
articulates current GTD behavior.
The Exchange is relocating rule text
governing IOC orders from Options 3,
Section 7(b)(3) into Supplementary
Material .02(d) to Options 3, Section 7
to specify that orders may be entered
with a TIF of IOC. The Exchange also
proposes a number of changes to
conform the Exchange’s IOC rule with
that of BX. None of the proposed
changes modify current Exchange IOC
functionality. First, the Exchange
proposes to remove the word ‘‘limit’’
from the relocated IOC rule text in
Supplementary Material .02(d). Today,
IOC orders may be sent as either a
Market Order or Limit Order.
Eliminating the word ‘‘limit’’ from the
proposed IOC rule will therefore align
the rule text with current
functionality.52 Second, the Exchange
proposes to memorialize current IOC
behavior in Supplementary Material
.02(d)(1) by stating that orders entered
with a TIF of IOC are not eligible for
routing.53 Third, the Exchange proposes
to codify current IOC behavior in
Supplementary Material .02(d)(2) by
stating that IOC orders may be entered
through FIX, OTTO or SQF.54
52 BX similarly allows both Market Orders and
Limit Orders to be entered as IOC. See BX Options
3, Section 7(b)(2). The Exchange is not specifying
Market and Limit Orders in the relocated IOC rule
text for consistency with the other TIFs in proposed
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3, Section
7.
53 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(A) for
identical language.
54 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B) for
substantially similar language. BX’s rule does not
refer to OTTO because BX does not offer OTTO
ports today.
PO 00000
Frm 00123
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
Fourth, the Exchange proposes to note
in the same section that an IOC order
entered by a Market Maker through SQF
will not be subject to the (A) Order Price
Protection,55 Market Order Spread
Protection,56 and Size Limitation
Protection 57 as defined in Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(A), (1)(B), and (2)(B),
respectively, for single leg orders, or (B)
Complex Order Price Protection 58 as
defined in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1)
for Complex Orders.59 Today, the IOC
rule explicitly excludes the Limit Order
Price Protection and Size Limitation
Protection from applying to IOC orders
entered through SQF. As discussed later
in this filing, the current Limit Order
Price Protection will be replaced by a
similar risk management tool called the
Order Price Protection that will be
identical to BX, so the Exchange will
likewise reflect that change in the
proposed IOC rule. The proposed
change to exclude the Market Order
Spread Protection from applying to IOC
orders entered through SQF is not a
change to IOC current functionality, but
rather, a change to align the rule with
current System behavior and with BX
IOC rule.60
The Exchange notes while it generally
only permits orders (including IOC
orders) to be entered into its two order
entry protocols, FIX and OTTO, it does
permit the entry of IOC orders by
Market Makers into its quote protocol,
SQF. The Exchange has elected not to
apply the specified risk protections on
IOC orders entered through SQF as it
does for IOC orders entered through FIX
and OTTO because only Market Makers
55 The current IOC rule references the Limit Order
Price Protection as set forth in Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A). As discussed later in this filing, the
Exchange is proposing to replace the existing Limit
Order Price Protection with a similar risk
management tool called Order Price Protection. See
proposed Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A).
56 Market Orders will be rejected if the NBBO is
wider than a preset threshold at the time the order
is received by the System. Market Order Spread
Protection shall not apply to the Opening Process
or during a trading halt. The Exchange may
establish different thresholds for one or more series
or classes of options. See Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(B).
57 There is a limit on the number of contracts an
incoming order or quote may specify. Orders or
quotes that exceed the maximum number of
contracts are rejected. The maximum number of
contracts, which shall not be less than 10,000, is
established by the Exchange from time-to-time. See
Options 3, Section 15(a)(2)(B).
58 This risk protection is currently called the
Limit Order Price Protection in Options 3, Section
16(c)(1). The Exchange is renaming this risk
protection in a concurrent filing to the Complex
Order Price Protection. See SR–MRX–2022–3P.
59 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B) for
substantially similar language. BX’s rule does not
refer to the Complex Order Price Protection because
BX does not offer complex functionality today.
60 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
utilize SQF to enter IOC orders. Market
Makers are professional traders with
their own risk settings. FIX and OTTO,
on the other hand, are utilized by all
market participants who may not have
their own risk settings, unlike Market
Makers. Market Makers utilize IOC
orders to trade out of accumulated
positions and manage their risk when
providing liquidity on the Exchange.
The Exchange understands that proper
risk management, including using these
IOC orders to offload risk, is vital for
Market Makers, and allows them to
maintain tight markets and meet their
quoting and other obligations to the
market. Market Makers handle a large
amount of risk when quoting and in
addition to the risk protections required
by the Exchange, Market Makers utilize
their own risk management parameters
when entering orders, minimizing the
likelihood of a Market Maker’s
erroneous order from being entered. The
Exchange believes that Market Makers,
unlike other market participants, have
the ability to manage their risk when
submitting IOC orders through SQF and
should be permitted to elect this method
of order entry to obtain efficiency and
speed of order entry, particularly in
light of the quoting obligations that the
Exchange imposes on these participants,
unlike other market participants.61 The
Exchange believes that allowing Market
Makers to submit IOC orders through
their preferred protocol increases their
efficiency in submitting such orders and
thereby allows them to maintain quality
markets to the benefit of all market
participants that trade on the Exchange.
For the foregoing reasons, the Exchange
has opted to not offer the Order Price
Protection, Market Order Spread
Protection, and Size Limitation (for
single leg orders), or the Complex Order
Price Protection (for Complex Orders),
for IOC orders entered through SQF
because Market Makers have more
sophisticated infrastructures than other
market participants and are able to
manage their risk.
The Exchange also proposes to add
substantially similar language in
Supplementary Material .03(c), which
governs the SQF protocol. Specifically,
the Exchange proposes to add:
‘‘Immediate-or-Cancel Orders entered
into SQF are not subject to the (i) Order
Price Protection, Market Order Spread
Protection, and Size Limitation
Protection in Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A), (1)(B), and (2)(B)
respectively, for single leg orders, or (ii)
Complex Order Price Protection as
defined in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1)
for Complex Orders.’’ Adding these
61 See
Options 2, Section 5(e).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
exceptions to the SQF rule as well as the
IOC rule will make clear that these order
protections will not apply to IOC orders
entered through SQF.
The Exchange further proposes to
specify in Supplementary Material
.02(d)(3) that Block Orders, Facilitation
Orders, Complex Facilitation Orders,
SOM Orders, Complex SOM Orders,
PIM Orders, Complex PIM Orders, QCC
Orders, QCC Complex Orders, Customer
Cross Orders, and Customer Cross
Complex Orders are considered to have
a TIF of IOC. By their terms, these
orders will be: (1) executed either on
entry or after an exposure period, or (2)
cancelled.62 The proposed changes in
Supplementary Material .02(d)(3)
memorialize current System behavior
and are intended to bring greater
transparency in how these order types
operate today.
The Exchange is relocating rule text
governing OPG orders from Options 3,
Section 7(o) into Supplementary
Material .02(e) to specify that orders
may be entered with a TIF of OPG. The
Exchange also proposes a number of
changes to conform the Exchange’s OPG
rule with that of BX. Other than as
specified below, the proposed changes
do not modify current Exchange OPG
functionality. The Exchange proposes to
remove the word ‘‘limit’’ from the
relocated OPG rule text in
Supplementary Material .02(e) in order
to reflect that the Exchange will now
allow both Market and Limit OPG
Orders. As noted above, this is a
proposed functionality change to align
with current BX OPG functionality.63
The Exchange also proposes nonsubstantive changes to replace the
current references to the opening
rotation with the term ‘‘Opening
Process’’ as defined in Options 3,
Section 8. The Exchange further
proposes to codify current OPG
behavior by stating that OPG orders may
not route.64 Lastly, the Exchange
proposes to memorialize current OPG
behavior by indicating that OPG orders
are not subject to any protections listed
in Options 3, Section 15, except Size
Limitation.65 Today, the Exchange does
not apply any of the risk protections in
Options 3, Section 15 (except Size
Limitation) because the Opening
Process itself has boundaries within
which orders will be executed.66
62 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(C) for
substantially similar language for PRISM orders.
63 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(1).
64 See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(1) for identical
language.
65 Id.
66 See Options 3, Section 8.
PO 00000
Frm 00124
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61399
Opening Process
In connection with the technology
migration, the Exchange proposes
several enhancements to its Opening
Process in Options 3, Section 8. The
Exchange first proposes to remove the
current limitation that only allows
routable Public Customer 67 interest to
route during the Opening Process.
Instead, all routable market participant
interest will be allowed to route to align
the Exchange’s opening functionality
with BX.68 Like BX, the Exchange
believes that it will be beneficial to
provide all market participants with the
opportunity to have their interest
executed on away markets during the
Opening Process. To effectuate the
foregoing, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 8(b) to
remove the sentence providing that only
Public Customer interest is routable
during the Opening Process. The
Exchange will also make a corrective
change within this rule to ‘‘nondisplayed portions.’’ The Exchange
further proposes to make a related
change in Options 3, Section 8(i)(7),
which currently provides that the
System will route routable Public
Customer interest pursuant to Options
3, Section 10(c)(1)(A). Specifically, the
Exchange proposes to remove the
reference to Public Customer to indicate
all routable interest will route in
accordance with the Exchange’s priority
rule. The Exchange will also update the
cross-cite to Options 3, Section
10(c)(1)(A), currently pointing to the
Priority Customer priority overlay, to
the more general priority rule in
Options 3, Section 10(c). The Exchange
further proposes to amend Options 3,
Section 8(j)(6) to remove the references
to ‘‘Public Customer.’’ As amended,
67 The term ‘‘Public Customer’’ means a person or
entity that is not a broker or dealer in securities. See
Option 1, Section 1(a)(41).
68 See BX Options 3, Section 8. See also
Securities Exchange Act Release No. 89731
(September 1, 2020), 85 FR 55524 (September 8,
2020) (SR–BX–2020–016) (noting throughout that
BX permits all market participants to route during
its Opening Process). At the end of the Opening
Process, pursuant to MRX Options 3, Section 8(j)(6)
and subsection (i), the System will execute orders
at the Opening Price that have contingencies (such
as, without limitation, Reserve Orders) and nonroutable orders, such as a ‘Do-Not-Route’ or ‘DNR’
Orders, to the extent possible. The System will only
route non-contingency Public Customer orders,
except that Public Customer Reserve Orders may
route up to their full volume. For contracts that are
not routable, pursuant to MRX Options 3, Section
8(j)(6), such as DNR Orders and orders priced
through the Opening Price, the System will cancel
(1) any portion of a Do-Not-Route order that would
otherwise have to be routed to the exchange(s)
disseminating the ABBO for an opening to occur,
or (2) any order or quote that is priced through the
Opening Price. All other interest will be eligible for
trading after opening.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
61400
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Section 8(j)(6) will provide: ‘‘The
System will execute orders at the
Opening Price that have contingencies
(such as, without limitation, Reserve
Orders) and non-routable orders, such
as ‘‘Do-Not-Route’’ or ‘‘DNR’’ Orders, to
the extent possible. The System will
only route non-contingency orders,
except that Reserve Orders may route up
to their full volume.’’
In addition, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 8(g)(1), which
currently describes how the Potential
Opening Price would be calculated
when there is more than one Potential
Opening Price.69 Today, Section 8(g)(1)
provides that when two or more
Potential Opening Prices would satisfy
the maximum quantity criterion and
leave no contracts unexecuted, the
System takes the highest and lowest of
those prices and takes the mid-point; if
such mid-point is not expressed as a
permitted minimum price variation, it
will be rounded to the minimum price
variation that is closest to the closing
price for the affected series from the
immediately prior trading session. If
there is no closing price from the
immediately prior trading session, the
System will round up to the minimum
price variation to determine the
Opening Price. The Exchange now
proposes to no longer round in the
direction of the previous trading day’s
closing price and simply round up to
the minimum price variation if the midpoint of the high/low is not expressed
as a permitted minimum price variation.
The proposed changes are intended to
simplify and bring greater transparency
to the Opening Process, as market
participants can now have a better sense
of how the Potential Opening Price will
be calculated without having to account
for the closing price of each options
series.
The Exchange further proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 8(i)(3), which
currently describes the determination of
Opening Quote Range (‘‘OQR’’)
boundaries in certain scenarios.70
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to
replace ‘‘are marketable against the
ABBO’’ with ‘‘cross the ABBO’’ to more
precisely describe the specified scenario
within in this rule. The Exchange notes
that this is not a System change, but
rather a clarifying change around the
applicability of the rule text.
69 The Potential Opening Price indicates a price
where the System may open once all other Opening
Process criteria is met.
70 OQR is an additional type of boundary used in
the Opening Process, and is intended to limit the
opening price to a reasonable, middle ground price,
thus reducing the potential for erroneous trades
during the Opening Process.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Auction Mechanisms
Facilitation and Solicited Order
Mechanisms
The Exchange first proposes to make
clarifying changes in Options 3, Section
11 (Auction Mechanisms). Today,
Supplementary Material .02 to Options
3, Section 11 states that Responses 71
represent non-firm interest that can be
canceled at any time prior to execution,
and that Responses are not displayed to
any market participants. The Exchange
now proposes a non-substantive change
to relocate this language into the
introductory paragraph of Options 3,
Section 11 after the definition of
‘‘Response’’ for better readability. The
Exchange also proposes to add ‘‘or
modified’’ after the ‘‘canceled’’ to
indicate that auction Responses may be
canceled or modified at any time prior
to execution. This is not a change to
current System behavior, but rather a
clarification that better aligns the rule
text to existing functionality. The
Exchange also notes that the rules for
the complex Facilitation and Solicited
Order Mechanisms in Options 3,
Sections 11(c)(7) and (e)(4),
respectively, already provide for this
concept.72
Price Improvement Mechanism
The Exchange proposes a number of
changes to Options 3, Section 13 (Price
Improvement Mechanism for Crossing
Transactions), some of which are
System changes to align with existing
BX Price Improvement Mechanism (‘‘BX
PRISM’’) functionality and others that
are non-System changes that add greater
clarity to current PIM behavior. The
Exchange proposes to amend Options 3,
Section 13(b)(4) to add clarifying rule
text to the current sentence, which
states, ‘‘The Crossing Transaction 73 may
not be canceled, but the price of the
Counter-Side Order may be improved
during the exposure period.’’ The
Exchange proposes to add ‘‘or
modified’’ after the word ‘‘canceled’’ to
71 For purposes of Options 3, Section 11, a
‘‘Response’’ means an electronic message that is
sent by Members in response to a broadcast
message. A ‘‘broadcast message’’ is an electronic
message sent by the Exchange to all Members upon
entry of an order into one of the auction
mechanisms listed within Options 3, Section 11
(i.e., Block, Facilitation, or Solicited Order
Mechanisms).
72 Specifically, these provisions state that
Responses submitted by Members shall not be
visible to other auction participants during the
exposure period and can be modified or deleted
before the exposure period has ended.
73 A ‘‘Crossing Transaction’’ is comprised of the
order the Electronic Access Member represents as
agent (the ‘‘Agency Order’’) and a counter-side
order for the full size of the Agency Order (the
‘‘Counter-Side Order’’). See Options 3, Section
13(b).
PO 00000
Frm 00125
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
make clear that the Crossing Transaction
may not be canceled or modified, but
the Counter-Side Order may be
improved during the exposure period.
This proposed change would not amend
the current System, rather it would
bring greater clarity to the rule text that
modifications are not permitted unless
the Counter-Side Order is being
improved during the exposure period.
The Exchange proposes to add rule
text within Options 3, Section 13(b)(5)
which states, ‘‘Crossing Transactions
submitted at or before the opening of
trading are not eligible to initiate an
auction and will be rejected.’’ The
Exchange notes that this rule text
represents current System behavior. BX
has a similar provision within BX
Options 3, Section 13(i)(E). The
Exchange notes that this rule text will
bring greater clarity to when a Crossing
Transaction would be eligible to initiate
a PIM.
The Exchange proposes to amend the
current PIM functionality within
Options 3, Section 13(c)(3). Today,
during the exposure period,
Improvement Orders 74 may not be
canceled, however, Improvement Orders
may be modified to (i) increase the size
at the same price, or (ii) improve the
price of the Improvement Order for any
size up to the size of the Agency Order.
The Exchange proposes to amend this
functionality so that Improvement
Orders may be canceled or modified
similar to functionality on BX PRISM
today within BX Options 3, Section
13(ii)(A)(8). The modification and
cancellation of an Improvement Order
through OTTO will be similar to the
manner in which a Cancel and Replace
Order 75 would be handled outside of
the auction process. For Improvement
Orders through SQF, the modification
and cancellation of such orders will be
handled by sending new Improvement
Orders that overwrite the existing
74 Improvement Orders are responses entered by
Members to indicate the size and price at which
they want to participate in the execution of the
Agency Order. See Options 3, Section 13(c)(1).
75 Cancel and Replace Orders shall mean a single
message for the immediate cancellation of a
previously received order and the replacement of
that order with a new order. If the previously
placed order is already filled partially or in its
entirety, the replacement order is automatically
canceled or reduced by the number of contracts that
were executed. The replacement order will retain
the priority of the cancelled order, if the order posts
to the Order Book, provided the price is not
amended, size is not increased, or in the case of
Reserve Orders, size is not changed. If the
replacement portion of a Cancel and Replace Order
does not satisfy the System’s price or other
reasonability checks (e.g., Options 3, Section
15(b)(1)(A) and Options 3, Section 15(b)(1)(B)) the
existing order shall be cancelled and not replaced.
See Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3,
Section 7.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Improvement Order with updated price/
quantity instructions.
Next, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 13(d)(5),
which currently states, ‘‘If a trading halt
is initiated after an order is entered into
the Price Improvement Mechanism,
such auction will be automatically
terminated without execution.’’ The
Exchange proposes to instead provide,
‘‘If a trading halt is initiated after an
order is entered into the Price
Improvement Mechanism, such auction
will be automatically terminated with
execution solely with the Counter-Side
Order.’’ In the event of a trading halt,
since the Counter-Side Order has
guaranteed that an execution will occur
at the same price as the Crossing
Transaction or better, and Improvement
Orders offer no such guarantee, the
Counter-Side Order is the only valid
price at which to execute the Crossing
Transaction. This is similar to
functionality on BX PRISM at BX
Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C).76
The Exchange also proposes a System
change to adopt a new same side
execution price check for PIM, which
will be described in new subsection
(d)(6) of Options 3, Section 13 and will
be functionally identical to BX PRISM.
As proposed, Options 3, Section
13(d)(6) will provide that if the PIM
execution price would be the same or
better than an order on the limit order
book on the same side of the market as
the Agency Order, the Agency Order
may only be executed at a price that is
at least $0.01 better than the resting
order’s limit price. If such resting
order’s limit price is equal to or crosses
the initiating Crossing Transaction
price, then the entire Agency Order will
trade at the initiating Crossing
Transaction price with all better priced
counter-side interest being considered
for execution at the initiating Crossing
Transaction price. As noted above, this
price check will be functionally
identical to the same side execution
price check on BX PRISM today.77 Like
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
76 BX
Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C) provides that if
the situations described in sub-paragraphs (B)(2) or
(3) above occur, the entire PRISM Order will be
executed at: (1) in the case of the BX BBO crossing
the PRISM Order stop price, the best response
price(s) or, if the stop price is the best price in the
Auction, at the stop price, unless the best response
price is equal to or better than the price of a limit
order resting on the Order Book on the same side
of the market as the PRISM Order, in which case
the PRISM Order will be executed against that
response, but at a price that is at least $0.01 better
than the price of such limit order at the time of the
conclusion of the Auction; or (2) in the case of a
trading halt on the Exchange in the affected series,
the stop price, in which case the PRISM Order will
be executed solely against the Initiating Order. Any
unexecuted PAN responses will be cancelled.
77 BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(I) provides that if
the execution price of the PRISM Auction would be
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
BX, the proposed price check is
designed to ensure that the Exchange
would not trade at prices that would
lock or cross interest on the same side
of the market as the Agency Order
where limit orders have rested and
obtained priority to execute at that
price. In the event where a limit order
arrives on the same side of the market
as the Agency Order and is at the same
or better price than the initiating
Crossing Transaction price, the
Exchange would execute the entire PIM
order at the initiating Crossing
Transaction price. The execution takes
place at this price because the PIM is
guaranteed an execution and the PIM
agency side instructions would not
allow an execution to take place at a
higher (lower) price than submitted for
a buying (selling) agency side PIM
order. Considering that the limit order
has arrived either at or better on the
same side as the Agency Order than the
agency side price, the initiating Crossing
Transaction price is the only price at
which the guaranteed execution can
take place.
The following examples illustrate
how the proposed PIM execution price
check would work:
Example: PIM Executes With
Improvement Order at $0.01 Better Than
a Limit Order on the Same Side of the
Market as the Agency Order
Firm Limit order to buy @1.40 arrives
prior to the PIM auction beginning
MRX BBO: 1.40 × 2.00
PIM Agency Order to buy 20 @1.50
arrives with an auto-match price of
1.50 indicated
PIM Improvement Order 78 to sell 20 @
1.40 arrives
Auction concludes after timer and PIM
Agency Order trades 20 with PIM
Improvement Order @1.41; the
Counter-Side Order 79 cancels
the same or better than an order on the limit order
book on the same side of the market as the PRISM
Order, the PRISM Order may only be executed at
a price that is at least $0.01 better than the resting
order’s limit price. If such resting order’s limit price
is equal to or crosses the stop price, then the entire
PRISM Order will trade at the stop price with all
better priced interest being considered for execution
at the stop price.
78 ‘‘Improvement Orders’’ are responses sent by
Members during the PIM’s exposure period in
response to the PIM that indicate the size and price
at which they want to participate in the execution
of the Agency Order. See Options 3, Section
13(c)(1).
79 The ‘‘Counter-Side Order’’ is the counter-side
order for the full size of the Agency Order that is
entered into the PIM by the initiating Electronic
Access Member. See Options 3, Section 13(b).
PO 00000
Frm 00126
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61401
Example: PIM Executes at Agency Price
With All Better Priced Interest When
Limit Order on Same Side Equals or
Crosses the Initiating Crossing
Transaction Price
Assume MRX BBO: 1.00 × 2.00
PIM Agency Order to buy 20 @1.50
arrives with an auto-match price of
1.50 indicated
PIM Improvement Order to sell 20 @1.40
arrives
During the exposure period, Firm Limit
order to buy @1.50 arrives
Auction concludes after timer and PIM
Agency Order trades 12 with PIM
Improvement Order @1.50 and 8 with
the Counter-Side Order @1.50 (i.e., the
guaranteed execution price) because
all better priced interest must trade at
the initiating Crossing Transaction
price when the limit order on the
same side equals or crosses the
initiating Crossing Transaction
price.80 The remainder of the
Counter-Side Order and the
remainder of the PIM Improvement
Order cancel. The execution takes
place at 1.50 because the PIM is
guaranteed an execution, and the PIM
agency side instructions would not
allow an execution to take place at a
higher price than the submitted 1.50
buying price for the agency side PIM
order.
Further, the Exchange proposes
amendments to Complex PIM, some of
which are similar to the amendments
proposed for simple PIM. Similar to
simple PIM, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) to
state, ‘‘During the exposure period,
Improvement Complex Orders may be
canceled or modified.’’ 81 The Exchange
proposes to amend this functionality so
that Improvement Orders may be
canceled or modified similar to
functionality on BX today within BX
Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8).82
The Exchange also proposes to
relocate the last sentence of Options 3,
Section 13(e)(3) into Options 3, Section
80 The order is allocated pursuant to Options 3,
Section 13(d)(3) where the Counter-Side Order will
be allocated the greater of 1 contract or 40%, which,
in this case, equates to 8 contracts out of the 20
contracts. Thus, in this case, the Improvement
Order is allocated 12 contracts to fully execute the
20 contracts of the original PIM Agency Order.
81 Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) currently states,
‘‘During the exposure period, Improvement
Complex Orders may not be canceled, but may be
modified to (1) increase the size at the same price,
or (2) improve the price of the Improvement
Complex Order for any size.’’
82 BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8) provides that
a PAN response must be equal to or better than the
displayed NBBO at the time of receipt of the PAN
response. PAN responses may be modified or
cancelled during the Auction. A PAN response
submitted with a price that is outside the NBBO
will be rejected.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61402
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
13(e)(4)(iv) at new ‘‘(E)’’. The Exchange
proposes similar rule text within simple
PIM to indicate that an exposure period
would automatically terminate if a
trading halt is initiated after the order is
entered into a Complex PIM. The
relocation would add the rule text to a
more logical place within the Complex
PIM rule.
The Exchange further proposes in the
same rule to memorialize another
scenario in which the exposure period
for a Complex PIM would early
terminate today. Specifically, the
Exchange proposes to amend Options 3,
Section 13(e)(4)(iv) at new ‘‘(D)’’ to
provide that the exposure period will
automatically terminate when a resting
Complex Order in the same complex
strategy on either side of the market
becomes marketable against the
Complex Order Book or bids and offers
for the individual legs. The Exchange
believes that the proposed codification
will detail for market participants the
situations in which early termination
would occur for Complex PIMs today,
and align the Exchange’s rules with
current System behavior. The Exchange
notes that the exposure period for a
Complex Order Exposure likewise early
terminates today when a resting
Complex Order becomes marketable
against the Complex Order Book or bids
and offers for the individual legs.83
Accordingly, the proposed language
closely tracks existing Complex Order
Exposure language. The Exchange
believes that it is appropriate to early
terminate Complex PIM under these
circumstances for the following reasons.
When the resting Complex Order is on
the same side as the Agency Complex
Order, interest that becomes marketable
against the resting Complex Order
would also be marketable against the
Complex PIM order. Therefore, early
terminating the Complex PIM would
allow the Complex PIM order to interact
with this interest given that the
Complex PIM order is at a superior price
compared to the resting Complex Order,
thus providing an opportunity for price
improvement for the Agency Complex
83 Supplementary Material .01(b)(ii) of MRX
Options 3, Section 14 provides that the exposure
period for a Complex Order will end immediately:
(A) upon the receipt of a Complex Order for the
same complex strategy on either side of the market
that is marketable against the Complex Order Book
or bids and offers for the individual legs; (B) upon
the receipt of a non-marketable Complex Order for
the same complex strategy on the same side of the
market that would cause the price of the exposed
Complex Order to be outside of the best bid or offer
for the same complex strategy on the Complex
Order Book; or (C) when a resting Complex Order
for the same complex strategy on either side of the
market becomes marketable against interest on the
Complex Order book or bids and offers for same
individual legs of the complex strategy.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Order. Additionally, when the resting
Complex Order is on the opposite side
of the Agency Complex Order, interest
that arrives marketable against the
resting Complex Order is now at a
superior price to the Agency Complex
Order. The Exchange would therefore
early terminate in this scenario and
execute the Complex PIM order with its
contra side order because it is no longer
at top of book.
The Exchange also proposes to codify
existing System behavior in the
Complex PIM rule at Options 3, Section
13(e)(5), which currently provides that
when a marketable Complex Order on
the opposite side of the Agency
Complex Order ends the exposure
period, it will participate in the
execution of the Agency Complex Order
at the price that is mid-way between the
best counter-side interest and the same
side best bid or offer on the Complex
Order Book or net price from MRX best
bid or offer on individual legs,
whichever is better, so that both the
marketable Complex Order and the
Agency Complex Order receive price
improvement. Specifically, the
Exchange proposes to add that
transactions will be rounded, when
necessary, to the $0.01 increment that
favors the Agency Complex Order. As
noted above, this is not a functionality
change, but rather is intended to better
articulate current System behavior. The
Exchange also notes that the simple PIM
rule already articulates that the mid-way
price will be rounded to the $0.01
increment that favors the Agency Order
in Options 3, Section 13(d)(4). The
rounding for Complex PIM currently
operates the same way as simple PIM in
this respect, so the proposed Complex
PIM language closely tracks the simple
PIM language.
Finally, the Exchange proposes to
amend Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 3, Section 13 to add the
following sentence: ‘‘It will be
considered a violation of this Rule and
will be deemed conduct inconsistent
with just and equitable principles of
trade and a violation of Options 9,
Section 1 if an Electronic Access
Member submits a PIM Order (initiating
an auction) and also submits its own
Improvement Order in the same
auction.’’ BX has a similar prohibition
within BX Options 3, Section 13(iii).
The proposed new rule is intended to
provide guidance to Members where
certain behavior within a PIM will not
be considered a bona fide transaction.
Order Price Protection
The Exchange currently has a Limit
Order Price Protection in Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(A), which is a ‘‘fat
PO 00000
Frm 00127
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
finger’’ check designed to address risks
to market participants of human error in
entering certain orders at unintended
prices. Specifically, there is a limit on
the amount by which incoming limit
orders to buy may be priced above the
Exchange’s best offer and by which
incoming limit orders to sell may be
priced below the Exchange’s best bid.
Limit orders that exceed the pricing
limit are rejected. The limit is
established by the Exchange from timeto-time for orders to buy (sell) as the
greater of the Exchange’s best offer (bid)
plus (minus): (i) an absolute amount not
to exceed $2.00, or (ii) a percentage of
the Exchange’s best bid/offer not to
exceed 10%.
The Exchange proposes to replace the
existing risk protection with an Order
Price Protection (‘‘OPP’’) that would
similarly prevent the execution of limit
orders at prices outside pre-set
parameters. The proposed OPP will be
functionally similar to the OPP
functionality currently offered by BX.84
In particular, proposed Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(A) will provide that
OPP is a feature of the System that
prevents limit orders at prices outside of
pre-set standard limits from being
accepted by the System. Further, OPP
will reject incoming orders that exceed
certain parameters according to the
following algorithm set forth in
proposed Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A)(ii):
(a) If the better of the NBBO or the internal
market BBO (the ‘‘Reference BBO’’) on the
contra-side of an incoming order is greater
than $1.00, orders with a limit more than the
greater of the below will cause the order to
be rejected by the System upon receipt.
(1) 50% less (greater) than such contra-side
Reference Best Bid (Offer); or
(2) a configurable dollar amount not to
exceed $1.00 less (greater) than such contraside Reference Best Bid (Offer) as specified
by the Exchange announced via an Options
Trader Alert.
(b) If the Reference BBO on the contra-side
of an incoming order is less than or equal to
$1.00, orders with a limit more than the
greater of the below will cause the order to
be rejected by the System upon receipt.
(1) 100% less (greater) than such contraside Reference Best Bid (Offer); or
(2) a configurable dollar amount not to
exceed $1.00 less (greater) than such contra84 BX’s OPP is currently memorialized in BX
Options 3, Section 15(a)(1), which provides that
OPP is a feature of the System that prevents certain
day limit, good til cancelled, and immediate or
cancel orders at prices outside of pre-set standard
limits from being accepted by the System. BX’s rule
also provides that OPP applies to all options but
does not apply to market orders. As described
above, the Exchange is proposing to adopt an OPP
rule that more accurately describes this
functionality than BX’s current OPP rule. BX will
file a separate rule change to conform its OPP rule
with the Exchange’s proposed rule text.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
side Reference Best Bid (Offer) as specified
by the Exchange announced via an Options
Trader Alert.
The proposed OPP will be calculated
using the better of the NBBO or the
internal market BBO (i.e., the Reference
BBO) instead of the Exchange BBO as
currently used today, which will align
to current BX functionality.85 Like BX,
the Exchange believes that calculating
OPP on the basis of the better of the
NBBO or the internal market BBO
protects investors and the public
interest where the internal market BBO
is better than the NBBO. In addition, the
proposed OPP parameters will be the
greater of a percentage threshold or
fixed dollar amount, similar to today’s
limit order price protection that uses the
greater of a percentage or fixed dollar
threshold. The proposed parameters are
identical to BX’s OPP.86 The Exchange
believes that the proposed algorithm for
OPP would continue to provide a
reasonable limit to the range where
orders will be accepted.
As set forth in proposed Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i), OPP will be
operational each trading day after the
opening until the close of trading,
except during trading halts, which will
be identical to current functionality.87
The Exchange also proposes in this
paragraph to add identical language as
BX, which will provide the Exchange
with discretion to temporarily
deactivate OPP from time to time on an
intra-day basis if it is determined that
unusual market conditions warranted
deactivation in the interest of a fair and
orderly market. Like BX, the Exchange
believes that it will be useful to have the
flexibility to temporarily disable OPP
intra-day in response to an unusual
market event (for example, if
dissemination of data was delayed and
resulted in unreliable underlying values
needed for the Reference BBO).
Members would be notified of intra-day
OPP deactivation and any subsequent
reactivation by the Exchange through
the issuance of System status messages.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to
add in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i)
that OPP may be temporarily
deactivated on an intra-day basis at the
Exchange’s discretion.
The following examples illustrate the
application of the proposed OPP
thresholds:
85 See
BX Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(B).
The Exchange will initially set the fixed
dollar configuration at $0.05, identical to BX.
87 See Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A) (currently
providing that the limit order price protection does
not apply to the opening process or during a trading
halt).
86 Id.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
61403
Example: An Option Priced Less Than
or Equal to $1.00
For a penny MPV option with a BBO on
MRX of $0.01 × $0.02, consider that
the configurable dollar amount is set
to $0.05
If the incoming order was less than
$1.00, and the Reference BBO is the
internal market BBO, the System will
reject buy orders priced higher than
the greater of (i) $0.04 (100% greater
than the contra-side Reference Best
Offer of $0.02) or (ii) $0.07 ($0.02
offer + $0.05 configuration)
NBBO, the quote will be handled
pursuant to Options 3, Section 4(b)(6).90
When configured for cancel, Market
Makers will have their quotes cancelled
whenever the quote would lock or cross
the NBBO or be placed on the book at
a price other than its limit price.
Finally, the Exchange notes that similar
to BX, this risk protection will not apply
during an Opening Process because the
order book is established once options
series are open for trading.
Below are some examples of the PostOnly Quote Configuration functionality:
Example: An Option Priced Greater
Than $1.00
For a penny MPV option with a BBO on
MRX of $1.01 × $1.02, consider that
the configurable dollar amount is set
to $0.05
If the incoming order was more than
$1.00, and the Reference BBO is the
internal market BBO, the System will
reject buy orders priced higher than
the greater of (i) $1.53 (50% greater
than the contra-side Reference Best
Offer of $1.02) or (ii) $1.07 ($1.02
offer + $0.05 configuration)
Re-Priced Post-Only Quote
Configuration—Penny Interval Program
Display and Execution Example
• Penny Interval Program MPV in open
trading state
• Market Makers A and C do not have
Post-Only Quote Configuration risk
protection configured
• Market Maker B is configured for
Post-Only Quote Configuration reprice
• Market Maker A quote $0.98 (10) x
$1.00 (10)
• ABBO $0.96 × $1.03
• Market Maker B quote $1.00 (10) ×
$1.01 (10) arrives
Æ Bid side of quote re-prices onto
order book @0.99 and sets displayed
NBBO to 10 quantity
Æ Offer side rests at 1.01 without
issue
• Market Maker C quote $0.97 (20) ×
$0.98 (20) arrives
Trades 10 with Market Maker B @$0.99
and 10 with Market Maker A @$0.98
Market Maker B avoids taking
liquidity while Market Maker C, who
chose not to be configured for such,
removes liquidity by interacting with repriced interest on MRX’s order book.
Post-Only Quoting Protection
The Exchange proposes to adopt an
optional quoting protection for Market
Makers that will be identical to current
BX functionality.88 This optional risk
protection would allow Market Makers
to prevent their quotes from removing
liquidity from the Exchange’s order
book upon entry.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to
adopt the new risk protection in
Options 3, Section 15(a)(3)(C). As
proposed, Market Makers may elect to
configure their SQF protocols to prevent
their quotes from removing liquidity
(‘‘Post-Only Quote Configuration’’). A
Post-Only Quote Configuration would
re-price or cancel a Market Maker’s
quote that would otherwise lock or cross
any resting order or quote 89 on the
order book upon entry. Market Makers
may elect whether to re-price or cancel
their quotes with this functionality.
When configured for re-price, quotes
would be re-priced and displayed by the
System to one MPV below the current
best offer (for bids) or above the current
best bid (for offers). Notwithstanding the
aforementioned, if a quote with a PostOnly Quote Configuration would not
lock or cross an order or quote on the
System but would lock or cross the
88 See
BX Options 3, Section 15(c)(3).
would include any re-priced orders as
described in the Re-Pricing Filing as proposed
Options 3, Section 5(d), ALOs as described in
proposed Options 3, Section 7(n), and any re-priced
quotes as described in Options 3, Section 4(b)(6).
As described above, ALOs may re-price.
89 This
PO 00000
Frm 00128
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
Re-Priced Post-Only Quote
Configuration—Non-Penny Interval
Program Display and Execution
Example
• Non-Penny Interval Program MPV in
open trading state
• Market Maker A quote $0.95 (10) ×
$1.00 (10)
• ABBO $0.85 × $1.05
• Market Maker B (configured for PostOnly Quote Configuration and
selection of re-price upon quote)
quote arrives $1.00 (5) × $1.05 (5)
Æ Bid side quote re-prices on order
90 Options 3, Section 4(b)(6) provides that a quote
will not be executed at a price that trades through
another market or displayed at a price that would
lock or cross another market. If, at the time of entry,
a quote would cause a locked or crossed market
violation or would cause a trade-through violation,
it will either be re-priced and displayed at one
minimum price variance above (for offers) or below
(for bids) the national best price, or immediately
cancelled, as configured by the Member.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61404
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
book to $0.95
Æ Displays on order book @$0.95
(bid), which now shows (15
quantity)
Æ Offer side quote books and displays
in Depth of Market Feed at $1.05
• Order to sell 10 contracts arrives @
$0.95
Æ 7 contracts execute with Market
Maker A @$0.95
Æ 3 contracts execute with Market
Maker B @$0.95
In this example, the Market Maker
avoided taking liquidity by deploying
the Post-Only Quote Configuration with
re-price.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Kill Switch
As set forth in Options 3, Section 17,
the Exchange offers an order
cancellation Kill Switch, which is an
optional tool that allows Members to
initiate a message to the System to
promptly cancel and restrict their order
activity on the Exchange. Members may
submit a Kill Switch request to the
System for certain identifier(s)
(‘‘Identifier’’) on either a user or group
level.91 Today, Members can log in
through a graphical user interface
(‘‘GUI’’) to send a message to the
Exchange to initiate the order
cancellation Kill Switch.92 As an
alternative to the GUI Kill Switch,
Members may also send a message
through one of the Exchange’s order
entry ports (i.e., FIX and OTTO) to
initiate the order cancellation Kill
Switch.93 Once a Member initiates the
Kill Switch (either through the GUI or
an order entry port), it will result in the
cancellation of all existing orders for the
requested Identifier(s). The Member will
be unable to enter any additional orders
for the affected Identifier(s) until the
Member sends a re-entry request to the
Exchange.94
Due to the lack of demand for the GUI
Kill Switch by Members, the Exchange
proposes to decommission this optional
tool with the planned technology
migration.95 With the proposed changes,
the Exchange seeks to streamline its
product offerings and to reallocate
Exchange resources to other business
and risk management initiatives. While
91 Identifiers include Exchange accounts, ports,
and/or mnemonics. Thus, a Member using Kill
Switch may elect to cancel orders for an individual
Identifier (e.g., mnemonic) or any group of
Identifiers (e.g., all mnemonics within one Member
firm). Permissible groups must reside within a
single Member firm. See Options 3, Section 17(a).
92 See Options 3, Section 17(a)(2)
93 See Options 3, Section 17(a)(1).
94 See Options 3, Section 17(a)(3).
95 No Members have used the GUI Kill Switch for
order cancellation in 2022. The Exchange has
provided notice to Members via Options Trader
Alert. See Options Trader Alert #2022–30.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
the Exchange will no longer offer this
optional risk protection to Members
through the GUI, it will continue to offer
this functionality through FIX and
OTTO.
In addition, all Members may contact
the Exchange’s market operations staff
to request that the Exchange cancel any
of their existing bids, offers, or orders in
any series of options.96 Furthermore, the
Exchange will continue to have Systemenforced risk mechanisms that
automatically remove orders for the
Member once certain pre-set thresholds
or conditions are met. This includes risk
protections such as the market wide risk
protection 97 and cancel on
disconnect.98
To effect the proposed decommission
of the GUI Kill Switch for order
cancellation, the Exchange proposes to
amend Options 3, Section 17 by
eliminating paragraph (a)(2) and related
cross-cites within this rule. The
Exchange will also renumber the
paragraphs in this rule accordingly.
The Exchange notes that it previously
amended its rules to decommission the
quote removal Kill Switch that was
available to Market Makers through the
GUI.99 The Exchange noted in SR–
MRX–2021–10 that Market Makers did
not use the GUI Kill Switch to remove
their quotes, but rather, utilized other
means such as the mass purge request
through SQF. In this case, the Exchange
similarly notes that no Members use the
GUI Kill Switch to cancel their orders
but rather, utilize other means like the
port Kill Switch through FIX and OTTO
to purge their existing orders from the
System. As such, the Exchange believes
that eliminating the GUI Kill Switch all
together (including for orders as
proposed herein) will streamline the
Exchange’s risk protection offerings in a
manner that reflects Member use.
Data Feeds and TradeInfo
In connection with the technology
migration, the Exchange proposes a
96 The market wide risk protection automatically
removes Member orders when certain firm-set
thresholds are met. Once the thresholds are
triggered, the Member must send a re-entry
indicator to re-enter the System. See Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(C).
97 See Options 3, Section 19.
98 When the OTTO or FIX Port detects the loss of
communication with a Member’s Client Application
because the Exchange’s server does not receive a
Heartbeat message for a certain time period (‘‘nn’’
seconds), the Exchange will automatically logoff the
Member’s affected Client Application and if the
Member has elected to have its orders cancelled
pursuant to Section 18(f) (for OTTO) or Section
18(g) (for FIX) automatically cancel all orders. See
Options 3, Section 18(c) and (d).
99 See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 93004
(September 15, 2021), 86 FR 52516 (September 21,
2021) (SR–MRX–2021–10).
PO 00000
Frm 00129
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
number of enhancements to its current
data feed offerings in Options 3, Section
23(a), many of which are intended to
conform with current BX functionality,
as specified below.
As set forth in Options 3, Section
23(a)(1), the Exchange offers the Nasdaq
MRX Depth of Market Data Feed
(‘‘Depth of Market Feed’’), which
currently provides aggregate quotes and
orders at the top five price levels on
MRX, and provides subscribers with a
consolidated view of tradable prices
beyond the BBO, showing additional
liquidity and enhancing transparency
for MRX traded options. The data
provided for each option series includes
the symbols (series and underlying
security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the
series, and whether the option series is
available for trading on the Exchange
and identifies if the series is available
for closing transactions only. In
addition, subscribers are provided with
total aggregate quantity, Public
Customer aggregate quantity, Priority
Customer aggregate quantity, price, and
side (i.e., bid/ask). This information is
provided for each of the top five price
levels on the Depth Feed. The feed also
provides order imbalances on opening/
reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to no
longer provide book information for the
top five price levels, and instead
provide full depth-of-book information.
As such, the Exchange will delete
language that relates to top five price
level information in the rule text. The
Exchange also proposes to add more
specificity around what would be
provided in the opening/reopening
order imbalance information (namely,
the size of matched contracts and size
of the imbalance). The Exchange further
proposes a technical change to correct
an erroneous reference to ‘‘ISE’’ within
the rule text. The proposed changes will
closely align the information provided
on the Exchange’s Depth of Market Feed
with that of BX’s Depth of Market Feed,
except the Exchange will not offer
auction and exposure notifications on
its Depth of Market Feed like BX does
today.100 The Exchange already offers
auction and exposure notifications on
the Nasdaq MRX Order Feed as
described below.101 As amended,
100 See BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1). As
discussed below, the Exchange is instead proposing
to offer these notifications on the Nasdaq MRX
Order Feed. BX does not have a comparable order
feed today.
101 BX does not have a comparable order feed
today. However, the proposed data elements in the
MRX Order Feed already exist in the rules or
technical specifications (for the Attributable Order
content) of other options exchanges, as described
below.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1) would
provide:
Nasdaq MRX Depth of Market Data Feed
(‘‘Depth of Market Feed’’) is a data feed that
provides full order and quote depth
information for individual orders and quotes
on the Exchange book and last sale
information for trades executed on the
Exchange. The data provided for each option
series includes the symbols (series and
underlying security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the series,
and whether the option series is available for
trading on the Exchange and identifies if the
series is available for closing transactions
only. The feed also provides order
imbalances on opening/reopening (size of
matched contracts and size of the imbalance).
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
As set forth in Options 3, Section
23(a)(2), the Exchange offers the Nasdaq
MRX Order Feed (‘‘Order Feed’’), which
currently provides information on new
orders resting on the book (e.g., price,
quantity and market participant
capacity). In addition, the feed also
announces all auctions. The data
provided for each option series includes
the symbols (series and underlying
security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the
series, and whether the option series is
available for trading on MRX and
identifies if the series is available for
closing transactions only. The feed also
provides order imbalances on opening/
reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to
update the information that would be
available on the Order Feed. In
particular, the Exchange would include
Attributable Order tags 102 (as provided
by the Member) and related data content
around displayed order types and
specified order attributes (e.g., OCC
account number, give-up information,
CMTA information).103 The Exchange
also proposes to add more specificity
around what would be provided in the
opening/reopening order imbalance
information (namely, the size of
matched contracts and size of the
imbalance). This specifically aligns to
the data elements in both BX’s Depth of
Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section
23(a)(1) and the Exchange’s proposed
102 As discussed above, an Attributable Order is
a market or limit order which displays the user firm
ID for purposes of electronic trading on the
Exchange. See Options 3, Section 7(h).
103 The Exchange notes that Cboe has similar
attributable order functionality in Cboe Rule 5.6(c)
as an order a user designates for display (price and
size) that includes the user’s executing firm ID or
other unique identifier. While Cboe does not have
a comparable data feed rule, Cboe’s technical
specifications indicate that it currently has
Participant ID and Client ID tags available on its
Multicast PITCH data feed. See Section 4.6 in
https://cdn.cboe.com/resources/membership/US_
EQUITIES_OPTIONS_MULTICAST_PITCH_
SPECIFICATION.pdf (relating to Participant ID or
Client ID as optionally specified values).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Depth of Market Feed in proposed
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1). The
Exchange will continue to provide
auction notifications on the Order Feed,
but will relocate the existing language to
the end of the rule and adopt new
content by providing that the proposed
Order Feed will provide exposure
notifications as well.104 As amended,
Options 3, Section 23(a)(2) would
provide:
Nasdaq MRX Order Feed (‘‘Order Feed’’)
provides information on new orders resting
on the book (e.g., price, quantity, market
participant capacity and Attributable Order
tags when provided by a Member). The data
provided for each option series includes the
symbols (series and underlying security),
displayed order types, order attributes (e.g.,
OCC account number, give-up information,
CMTA information), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the series,
and whether the option series is available for
trading on MRX and identifies if the series
is available for closing transactions only. The
feed also provides order imbalances on
opening/reopening (size of matched contracts
and size of the imbalance), auction and
exposure notifications.
As set forth in Options 3, Section
23(a)(3), the Exchange offers the Nasdaq
MRX Top Quote Feed, which currently
calculates and disseminates MRX’s best
bid and offer position, with aggregated
size (including total size in aggregate,
for Professional Order size in the
aggregate and Priority Customer Order
size in the aggregate), based on
displayable order and quote interest in
the System. The feed also provides last
trade information along with opening
price, daily trading volume, high and
low prices for the day. The data
provided for each option series includes
the symbols (series and underlying
security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the
series, and whether the option series is
available for trading on MRX and
identifies if the series is available for
closing transactions only. The feed also
provides order imbalances on opening/
reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to
harmonize certain features of this feed
with BX’s Top of Market Feed while
104 BX’s Depth of Market Feed currently has
identical content relating to auction and exposure
notifications in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1).
Exposure notifications are new with the
introduction of routing and the removal of flash
functionality in the Routing Filing. An exposure
notification informs the market of an order that has
arrived marketable against an ABBO and has a
routing timer pursuant to the changes introduced to
Options 5, Section 4 in the Routing Filing, while
an auction notification is the notification of an
auction for a Block, simple/complex Facilitation,
simple/complex Solicited Order, simple/complex
PIM auction, or a complex exposure auction
pursuant to Supplementary Material .01 to Options
3, Section 14.
PO 00000
Frm 00130
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61405
retaining certain intended differences as
specified below.105 The Exchange first
proposes to rename the Nasdaq MRX
Top Quote Feed to the Nasdaq MRX Top
of Market Feed (‘‘Top Feed’’) to match
the BX feed name. The Exchange further
proposes to no longer provide
information for opening price, daily
trading volume, high and low prices for
the day. These are conforming changes
that would align the information
provided on the Exchange’s Top Feed
with information on BX’s Top Feed.106
The Exchange will continue to provide
aggregated size information as a legacy
holdover, which will be different than
current BX functionality. Similarly, the
Exchange will continue to provide
opening/reopening order imbalance
information on its Top Feed unlike BX.
As amended, Options 3, Section 23(a)(3)
will provide:
Nasdaq MRX Top of Market Feed (‘‘Top
Feed’’) calculates and disseminates MRX’s
best bid and offer position, with aggregated
size (including total size in aggregate, for
Professional Order size in the aggregate and
Priority Customer Order size in the
aggregate), based on displayable order and
quote interest in the System. The feed also
provides last trade information and for each
option series includes the symbols (series
and underlying security), put or call
indicator, expiration date, the strike price of
the series, and whether the option series is
available for trading on MRX and identifies
if the series is available for closing
transactions only. The feed also provides
order imbalances on opening/reopening.
As set forth in Options 3, Section
23(a)(4), the Exchange offers the Nasdaq
MRX Trades Feed (‘‘Trades Feed’’),
which currently displays last trade
information along with opening price,
daily trading volume, high and low
prices for the day. The data provided for
each option series includes the symbols
(series and underlying security), put or
call indicator, expiration date, the strike
price of the series, and whether the
option series is available for trading on
MRX and identifies if the series is
available for closing transactions only.
The Exchange proposes to no longer
provide information for opening price,
daily trading volume, high and low
prices for the day to align to the changes
proposed for the Top Feed described
above. As amended, Options 3, Section
23(a)(4) will provide:
Nasdaq MRX Trades Feed (‘‘Trades Feed’’)
displays last trade information. The data
provided for each option series includes the
symbols (series and underlying security), put
or call indicator, expiration date, the strike
price of the series, and whether the option
series is available for trading on MRX and
105 See
BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(2).
106 Id.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61406
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
identifies if the series is available for closing
transactions only.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
As set forth in Options 3, Section
23(a)(5), the Exchange offers the Nasdaq
MRX Spread Feed (‘‘Spread Feed’’),
which currently is a feed that consists
of: (1) options orders for all Complex
Orders (i.e., spreads, buy-writes, delta
neutral strategies, etc.); (2) data
aggregated at the top five price levels
(BBO) on both the bid and offer side of
the market; (3) last trades information.
The Spread Feed provides updates,
including prices, side, size, and
capacity, for every Complex Order
placed on the MRX Complex Order
Book. The Spread Feed shows: (1)
aggregate bid/ask quote size; (2)
aggregate bid/ask quote size for
Professional Customer Orders; and (3)
aggregate bid/ask quote size for Priority
Customer Orders for MRX traded
options. The feed also provides
Complex Order auction notifications.
Similar to the proposed changes to the
Depth of Market Feed above, the
Exchange now proposes in the Spread
Feed to no longer provide book
information for the top five price levels,
and instead provide full depth-of-book
information. As such, the Exchange will
delete language that relates to top five
price level information in the rule text,
and replace it with full depth language
that is substantively similar to the
language in the current BX Depth of
Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section
23(a)(1) and in the Exchange’s proposed
Depth of Market Feed in Options 3,
Section 23(a)(1), except the proposed
language herein will be tailored to
complex functionality. The Exchange
also proposes to add Attributable
Complex Order 107 tags (when provided
by the Member) into the Spread Feed.108
The Exchange also proposes to delete
the following sentence: ‘‘The Spread
Feed provides updates, including
prices, side, size, and capacity, for every
Complex Order placed on the MRX
Complex Order Book. The Spread Feed
shows: (1) aggregate bid/ask quote size;
(2) aggregate bid/ask quote size for
Professional Customer Orders; and (3)
aggregate bid/ask quote size for Priority
107 An Attributable Complex Order is a Market or
Limit Complex Order that is designated as an
Attributable Order as provided in Options 3,
Section 7(h). See Options 3, Section 14(b)(4).
108 Cboe currently allows complex orders to be
designated as Attributable. See Cboe Rule
5.33(b)(3). While Cboe does not have a comparable
data feed rule, Cboe’s technical specifications
indicate that it currently has Participant ID and
Client ID tags available on its Complex Multicast
PITCH data feed. See Section 3.8 in https://
cdn.cboe.com/resources/membership/US_
OPTIONS_COMPLEX_MULTICAST_PITCH_
SPECIFICATION.pdf (relating to Participant ID or
Client ID as optionally specified values).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Customer Orders for MRX traded
options.’’ The Exchange proposes
instead to incorporate these concepts
into the amended Spread Feed rule in
a manner that is more consistent with
the other amended rules in Options 3,
Section 23(a).
As amended, Options 3, Section
23(a)(5) will provide:
Nasdaq MRX Spread Feed (‘‘Spread Feed’’)
is a feed that consists of: (1) options orders
for all Complex Orders (i.e., spreads, buywrites, delta neutral strategies, etc.); (2) full
Complex Order depth information, including
prices, side, size, capacity, Attributable
Complex Order tags when provided by a
Member, and order attributes (e.g., OCC
account number, give-up information, CMTA
information), for individual Complex Orders
on the Exchange book; (3) last trades
information; and (4) calculating and
disseminating MRX’s complex best bid and
offer position, with aggregated size
(including total size in aggregate, for
Professional Order size in the aggregate and
Priority Customer Order size in the
aggregate), based on displayable Complex
Order interest in the System. The feed also
provides Complex Order auction
notifications.
In addition, the Exchange proposes to
no longer offer TradeInfo, which is a
user interface set forth in Options 3,
Section 23(b)(2) that permits Members
to: (i) search all orders submitted in a
particular security or all orders of a
particular type, regardless of their status
(open, canceled, executed, etc.); (ii)
view orders and executions; and (iii)
download orders and executions for
recordkeeping purposes. TradeInfo
users may also cancel open orders at the
order, port, or firm mnemonic level
through TradeInfo. Due to the lack of
demand for this interface by
Members,109 the Exchange seeks to
decommission the TradeInfo interface
when the Exchange migrates over to the
enhanced Nasdaq platform with the
technology migration.110 The Exchange
notes that FIX, FIX DROP,111 and the
Clearing Trade Interface (‘‘CTI’’),112
109 No
Members logged into TradeInfo in 2022.
Exchange provided notice to all Members
through an Options Trader Alert. See Options
Trader Alert #2022–29.
111 FIX DROP is a real-time order and execution
update message that is sent to a Member after an
order been received/modified or an execution has
occurred and contains trade details specific to that
Member. The information includes, among other
things, the following: (i) executions; (ii)
cancellations; (iii) modifications to an existing
order; and (iv) busts or post-trade corrections. See
Options 3, Section 23(b)(3).
112 CTI is a real-time cleared trade update
message that is sent to a Member after an execution
has occurred and contains trade details specific to
that Member. The information includes, among
other things, the following: (i) The Clearing Member
Trade Agreement (‘‘CMTA’’) or The Options
Clearing Corporation (‘‘OCC’’) number; (ii) badge or
mnemonic; (iii) account number; (iv) information
110 The
PO 00000
Frm 00131
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
which are available to all Members, can
be used today to obtain order
information that is currently available
within TradeInfo, and FIX can be used
to cancel orders today.
In connection with its proposal to
retire TradeInfo, the Exchange also
proposes to eliminate all references to
TradeInfo in Options 7 (Pricing
Schedule). Today, as set forth in
Options 7, Section 6(ii)(3), the Exchange
does not charge any fees for TradeInfo.
With the proposed changes, the
Exchange will amend Options 7 to
delete Section 6(ii)(3) in its entirety.
Optional Risk Protections
The Exchange proposes to introduce
optional quantity and notional value
checks in new Options 3, Section 28,
entitled ‘‘Optional Risk Protections.’’
The proposed optional order risk
protections will be functionally
identical to the protections currently
offered by BX.113 Members may use this
voluntary functionality through their
FIX protocols to limit the quantity and
notional value they can send per order
and on aggregate for the day.
Specifically, Members may establish
limits for the following parameters, as
set forth in proposed subparagraphs
(a)(1)–(4):
(1) Notional dollar value per order,
which will be calculated as quantity
multiplied by limit price multiplied by
number of underlying shares;
(2) Daily aggregate notional dollar
value;
(3) Quantity per order; and
(4) Daily aggregate quantity
Proposed paragraph (b) will provide
that Members may elect one or more of
the above optional risk protections by
contacting Market Operations and
providing a per order value (for (a)(1)
and (a)(3)) or daily aggregate value (for
(a)(2) and (a)(4)) for each order
protection. Members may modify their
settings through Market Operations.
Proposed paragraph (c) will provide that
the System will reject all incoming
aggregated Member orders for any of the
(a)(2) and (a)(4) risk protections after the
value configured by the Member is
exceeded. Proposed paragraph (d) will
provide that the System will reject all
incoming Member orders for any of the
(a)(1) and (a)(3) risk protections upon
which identifies the transaction type (e.g., auction
type) for billing purposes; and (v) market
participant capacity. See Options 3, Section
23(b)(1).
113 See BX Options 3, Section 28. While BX’s rule
does not contain the level of granularity as
proposed in the Exchange’s rule, including how
orders are rejected if any of the optional risk
protection values are exceeded, the Exchange
understands that BX’s optional risk protections
operate in the same manner.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
arrival if the value configured by the
Member is exceeded by the incoming
order. The Exchange notes that the
difference in handling between
aggregate and individual order
protections is necessary to allow for
complete processing of the final order
that puts a Member’s configured value
over the aggregate values configured.
While individual orders can be directly
measured against the configured values
for (a)(1) and (a)(3), the aggregate values
must be calculated after complete
processing of an order and thus the
rejection of orders begins upon the
arrival of the next order after the
aggregate values in (a)(2) or (a)(4) have
been exceeded.
The following example shows how
the System will reject all subsequent
incoming aggregated orders after the
(a)(2) or (a)(4) values configured by the
Member have been exceeded:
Aggregate Quantity Limit = 800.
1. Member enters an Order to Buy 500—
Accepted
2. Member enters an Order to Buy 400—
Accepted (Member did not meet the
configured limit of 800 with the
first order of 500 at the time
Member entered the second order)
3. Member enters an Order to Buy 1—
Rejected (Member already exceeded
the configured limit of 800 with the
second order of 400)
The following example shows how
the System will reject all incoming
orders upon arrival if the (a)(1) or (a)(3)
values configured by the Member have
been exceeded by the arriving order:
Quantity per Order Limit = 800.
1. Member enters an Order to Buy 801—
Rejected (Member exceeded the
Quantity per order limit upon
arrival with the order to buy 801
contracts)
Proposed paragraph (e) will provide
that if a Member sets a notional dollar
value, a Market Order would not be
accepted from that Member. This is
because notional dollar value is
calculated by using an order’s specified
limit price, and Market Orders by
definition are priced at the best
available price upon execution. Lastly,
proposed paragraph (f) will provide that
the proposed risk protections are only
available for orders entered through FIX.
Additionally, all of the proposed
settings will be firm-level.
2. Statutory Basis
The Exchange believes that its
proposal is consistent with Section 6(b)
of the Act,114 in general, and furthers
the objectives of Section 6(b)(5) of the
Act,115 in particular, in that it is
designed to promote just and equitable
principles of trade, to remove
impediments to and perfect the
mechanism of a free and open market
and a national market system, and, in
general to protect investors and the
public interest. As it relates to the
elimination of fees for flash
functionality and TradeInfo, the
Exchange believes that its proposal is
consistent with Section 6(b) of the
Act,116 in general, and furthers the
objectives of Sections 6(b)(4) and 6(b)(5)
of the Act,117 in particular, in that it
provides for the equitable allocation of
reasonable dues, fees, and other charges
among members and issuers and other
persons using any facility, and is not
designed to permit unfair
discrimination between customers,
issuers, brokers, or dealers.
Generally, the Exchange’s proposal is
intended to add or align certain System
functionality with functionality
currently offered on BX in order to
provide a more consistent technology
offering across affiliated Nasdaq options
exchanges. A more harmonized
technology offering, in turn, will
simplify technology implementation,
changes, and maintenance by market
participants of the Exchange that are
also participants on Nasdaq affiliated
options exchanges. The Exchange’s
proposal also seeks to provide greater
harmonization between the rules of the
Exchange and its affiliates, which would
result in greater uniformity, and less
burdensome and more efficient
regulatory compliance by market
participants. As such, the proposal
would foster cooperation and
coordination with persons engaged in
facilitating transactions in securities and
would remove impediments to and
perfect the mechanism of a free and
open market and a national market
system. The Exchange believes that
more consistent rules will increase the
understanding of the Exchange’s
operations for market participants that
are also participants on the Nasdaq
affiliated options exchanges, thereby
contributing to the protection of
investors and the public interest. The
proposal also seeks to memorialize
existing functionality and add more
granularity in the Exchange’s rules to
describe how existing functionality
operates today. The Exchange believes
that such changes would remove
impediments to and perfect the
mechanism of a free and open market
and a national market system because
115 15
U.S.C. 78f(b)(5).
U.S.C. 78f(b).
117 15 U.S.C. 78f(b)(4) and (5).
116 15
114 15
U.S.C. 78f(b).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
PO 00000
Frm 00132
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61407
the proposed changes would promote
transparency in Exchange rules and
reducing potential confusion, thereby
ensuring that Members, regulators, and
the public can more easily navigate the
Exchange’s rulebook and better
understand how options trading is
conducted on the Exchange.
Routing Changes
The Exchange believes that the
proposed amendments throughout
Options 3 and Options 7 to conform to
the Routing Filing is consistent with the
Act. As discussed above, the Routing
Filing harmonizes the Exchange’s
routing functionality with that of BX.118
As part of this harmonization, the
Routing Filing adopts or harmonizes
routing strategies on the Exchange that
are substantially identical to BX, (DNR,
FIND, and SRCH), and eliminates
existing Exchange routing functionality
that BX does not offer today (flash
functionality and Sweep Orders). The
proposed changes to Options 3 and
Options 7 herein will therefore ensure
that the Rules conform to the
amendments in the Routing Filing by
removing references to flash
functionality and Sweep Orders,
eliminating do-not-route orders as an
order type and describing it instead as
a DNR routing strategy to harmonize
with BX, and also making clear which
routing strategies may now be utilized
when submitting an order type. The
Exchange believes that the proposed
changes will bring greater clarity to the
Rulebook, which would benefit market
participants and investors by reducing
potential confusion.
The Exchange’s proposal to remove
pricing related to flash functionality
from Options 7 is reasonable, equitable,
and not unfairly discriminatory because
flash functionality would no longer be
available to any Member. It is
reasonable to remove the fees related to
flash orders and the references to flash
orders from the Exchange’s Pricing
Schedule as the Exchange is removing
this functionality from its Rulebook.
Additionally, it is equitable and not
unfairly discriminatory to remove the
fees related to flash orders and the
references to flash orders from the
Pricing Schedule because no Member
would be able to utilize the flash
functionality once it is removed from
the System.
118 As discussed above, the Routing Filing was
filed by ISE to amend ISE Options 5. Because MRX
Options 5 incorporates ISE Options 5 by reference,
amendments to ISE Options 5 are accordingly
integrated as amendments to MRX Options 5. See
supra note 3.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61408
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Bulk Message
Market Orders
All-or-None Orders
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to memorialize its bulk
message functionality is consistent with
the Act as it will codify existing
functionality, thereby promoting
transparency in the Exchange’s rules
and reducing any potential
confusion.119 This functionality
provides Market Makers with an
additional tool to meet their various
quoting obligations in a manner they
deem appropriate, consistent with the
purpose of the bulk message
functionality to facilitate Market
Makers’ provision of liquidity. By
providing Market Makers with
additional control over the quotes they
use to provide liquidity to the Exchange,
this tool may benefit all investors
through additional execution
opportunities at potentially improved
prices. As noted above, other options
exchanges like Cboe currently offer
similar bulk messaging functionality
that allow their market participants to
submit block quantity quotes in a single
electronic message.120
The Exchange does not believe that
the offering the bulk message
functionality to only Market Makers
would permit unfair discrimination.
Market Makers play a unique and
critical role in the options market by
providing liquidity and active markets,
and are subject to various quoting
obligations (which other market
participants are not, including
obligations to maintain active markets,
update quotes in response to changed
market conditions, to compete with
other Market Makers in its appointed
classes, and to provide intra-day quotes
in its appointed classes.121 Bulk
message functionality provides Market
Makers with a means to help them
satisfy these obligations.
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the definition of
Market Orders in Options 3, Section 7(a)
are consistent with the Act. The
proposed intra-day cancel timer feature
mirrors existing BX functionality in BX
Options 3, Section 7(a)(5), and would
provide Members with additional
flexibility and control to bring the
Market Order back to the Member so
they can get an execution on another
venue by canceling unexecuted Market
Orders after a certain period of time.
The Exchange believes it is appropriate
to offer this feature intra-day because
the Exchange already has a separate
opening delay timer that provides
protection to the market during the
Opening Process as discussed above.
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the definition of
AON Orders in Options 3, Section 7(c)
are consistent with the Act. As
discussed above, the Exchange is
memorializing current System behavior
by specifying how AON Orders will
execute against multiple, aggregated
orders to align with the level of detail
in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(4)(A). The
proposed description of the handling of
AON Orders is consistent with the
Exchange’s allocation methodology in
Options 3, Section 10 by making clear
that because of the size contingency of
the AON Order (i.e., executed in its
entirety or not at all), those orders must
be satisfied simultaneously to avoid any
priority conflict on the order book,
which considers current displayed
NBBO prices to avoid locked and
crossed markets as well as tradethroughs. Finally, the proposed changes
to add that AON Orders may not be
submitted during the Opening Process
will better articulate current System
behavior, and aligns to the level of
detail currently in BX’s AON rule at BX
Options 3, Section 7(a)(7).
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Order Types
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the rules governing
Exchange order types are consistent
with the Act. As discussed above, the
proposed changes consist of several
functional enhancements to align the
Exchange’s order types to existing BX
order types, and rule adjustments that
add more specificity and clarity to
existing order types.
119 As
discussed above, this existing functionality
is currently described in the Exchange’s publicly
available technical specifications. See supra note
13.
120 See supra note 16.
121 See Options 2, Sections 4 and 5.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Intermarket Sweep Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the definition of
ISOs in Options 3, Section 7(b)(5) are
consistent with the Act. As discussed
above, the proposed changes are
intended to add more granularity and
more closely align the level of detail in
the ISO rule with BX’s ISO rule in BX
Options 3, Section 7(a)(6) by specifying
how the Exchange would handle ISOs,
including how ISOs may be submitted
and when. As such, the Exchange
believes that its proposal will promote
transparency in the Exchange’s rules
and consistency across the rules of the
Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges.122
Furthermore, the proposed changes
do not amend current ISO functionality
except for the proposed stipulation that
ISOs must have a TIF designation of
IOC. Today, Options 5, Section 1(h)
provides that ISOs may be either an IOC
or an order that expires on the day it is
entered. The Exchange believes it is
appropriate to no longer allow non-IOC
ISOs, as an ISO is generally used when
trying to sweep a price level across
multiple exchanges in an effort to post
the balance of an order without locking
an away market. The Exchange therefore
believes that ISOs have a limited
purpose and should be cancelled if they
do not execute or do not entirely
execute. This is also consistent with
how BX currently handles ISOs in that
BX only allows ISOs to be entered as
IOC.
122 As noted above, BX’s ISO rule also currently
states that ‘‘ISOs may be entered on the Order Book
or into the PRISM Mechanism pursuant to Options
3, Section 13(ii)(K).’’ The Exchange will file a
separate rule change to add similar language as BX
relating to how ISOs may be entered on the
Exchange.
PO 00000
Frm 00133
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
Stop and Stop Limit Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the definition of
Stop Orders and Stop Limit Orders in
Options 3, Sections 7(d) and 7(e),
respectively, are consistent with the
Act. The Exchange is proposing to
codify current System behavior by
adding that Stop Orders and Stop Limit
Orders will be cancelled if they are
immediately electable upon receipt. As
discussed above, the purpose of each of
these order types is to not execute upon
entry, and instead rest in the System
until the market reaches a certain price
level, at which time the order could be
executed. A Stop Order or Stop Limit
Order that is immediately electable
upon receipt would therefore negate the
purpose of this order type, so the
Exchange believes it is appropriate to
cancel such orders to ensure that
Members are able to use these order
types to achieve their intended purpose.
As noted above, the proposed changes
to codify current Stop and Stop Limit
Order handling will align the
Exchange’s rules with Phlx’s Stop and
Stop Limit Order rules.123
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to specify current
System functionality that Stop and Stop
Limit Orders may only be entered into
FIX will make clear that these order
types are only available to be entered
123 See
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
supra notes 34 and 36.
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
through one of the two order entry
protocols offered by the Exchange (i.e.,
FIX and OTTO). As such, the proposed
changes will promote transparency in
the Exchange’s rules and reduce any
potential confusion.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Cancel and Replace Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the rule governing
Cancel and Replace Orders would
promote clarity and make the rules
easier to navigate. As discussed above,
these are non-substantive changes to
relocate the rule from Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7 into
the main body of the order types rule at
Options 3, Section 7(f), updating
incorrect cross-cites therein, and adding
more granularity around how the
Exchange will treat the cancellation and
replacement of Reserve Orders.
Reserve Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the Reserve Order
rule at Options 3, Section 7(g) are
consistent with the Act. The Exchange
is proposing to add more granularity
around how Members may elect to
refresh the display quantity for the
Reserve Order. The Exchange notes that
the new rule text does not have any
impact on the priority rules of the
displayed or non-displayed portion of
the Reserve Order. This refresh feature
for Reserve Orders is intended to
provide more flexibility and
opportunities for Members to add
displayed liquidity to the Exchange,
which, in turn, benefits all market
participants through more trading
opportunities and enhanced price
discovery. As discussed above, the
proposed changes do not amend current
functionality, but rather is intended to
promote transparency around the
current operation of Reserve Orders.
Further, the Exchange believes that the
non-substantive changes in the Reserve
Order rule to renumber and reformat the
paragraphs therein, and make corrective
changes as described above, are
consistent with the protection of
investors and the public interest
because they will simply make the
Exchange’s rules easier to navigate,
thereby reducing any potential
confusion. As noted above, other
options exchanges like Cboe currently
offer Reserve Orders that have similar
refresh features.124
Attributable Orders
The Exchange believes that it is
consistent with the Act to delete
existing rule text in Options 3, Section
124 See
supra note 39.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
7(h), which currently indicates that
Attributable Orders may be available for
specified classes of securities, and to
make a corrective change to ‘‘an Options
Trader Alert.’’ Because Attributable
Orders are available for all classes of
securities today, the Exchange is
deleting this language as inaccurate. The
Exchange believes that the proposed
changes will promote transparency in
the Exchange’s rules.
Customer Cross Orders
The Exchange believes that the nonsubstantive amendment in Options 3,
Section 7(i) to add that Customer Cross
Orders may trade in accordance with
Options 3, Section 12(a) is consistent
with the protection of investors and the
public interest because the proposal will
simply add a cross reference in the
Customer Cross Order rule to Section
12(a), which currently describes in
detail how this order type would
execute on the Exchange, thereby
adding clarity to how Customer Cross
Orders function today.
Qualified Contingent Cross Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the QCC Order rule
in Options 3, Section 7(j) to add a
reference to ‘‘QCC’’ and to provide that
QCC Orders will trade in accordance
with Options 3, Section 12(c) are
consistent with the Act because the
changes are merely intended to add
greater clarity to how QCC Orders
function today. The Exchange further
believes that specifying that QCC Orders
may only be entered through FIX will
better articulate current System
behavior, and will make clear that QCC
Orders are available to be entered
through only one of the two order entry
protocols currently offered by the
Exchange (i.e., FIX and OTTO), thereby
reducing any potential confusion.
Preferenced Orders
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to add a definition of
Preferenced Orders in Options 3,
Section 7(l) is consistent with the Act.
While Preferenced Orders are currently
described in Options 2, Section 10, the
Exchange believes that it would be
useful to have order types centralized
within one rule to make the Rulebook
easier to navigate for market
participants. As noted above, Phlx
similarly lists out Directed Orders (akin
to Preferenced Orders) in its order types
rule at Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(11).
Add Liquidity Orders
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the ALO rule in
Options 3, Section 7(n) are consistent
PO 00000
Frm 00134
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61409
with the Act. As discussed above, the
Exchange is enhancing current ALO
functionality to reflect that the
Exchange will handle ALOs in a
consistent manner with the new
continuous re-pricing mechanism that is
being proposed concurrently in the RePricing Filing as proposed Options 3,
Section 5(d) in situations where the
ALO would not lock or cross an order
or quote on the System, but would lock
or cross the NBBO.125 The Exchange
therefore believes that the proposed
changes will make clear how the
Exchange will handle ALOs under the
new re-pricing mechanism. The ALO
order type was adopted to provide
market participants greater control over
the circumstances in which their orders
are executed. As noted above, the
purpose of an ALO is to provide
liquidity. For investors and market
participants that elect only to provide
liquidity in certain circumstances, such
as to receive a maker fee (or rebate)
upon execution of an order, the
Exchange continues to believe that
ALOs, as amended under this proposal,
will continue to accommodate this
strategy. The proposed order handling
for ALOs is consistent with how ALOs
are handled on BX today.126
The Exchange also believes that
adding ‘‘or quotes’’ in the ALO rule at
Options 3, Section 7(n) is consistent
with the Act. Today, if at the time of
entry, an ALO would lock or cross one
or more non-displayed orders or quotes
on the Exchange, the ALO will be
cancelled or re-priced in the manner
specified within the ALO rule. Adding
this rule text will bring greater clarity
around current ALO behavior.
The Exchange further believes that the
proposed addition that ALOs may only
be submitted when an options series is
open for trading will make clear ALOs
will not be accepted during the Opening
Process as the order book is not
available. The proposed changes codify
existing System behavior, and will
therefore promote transparency in the
Exchange’s rules.
QCC With Stock Orders
The Exchange believes that the nonsubstantive change to correct a crosscite in the QCC with Stock Order rule
in Options 3, Section 7(t) will promote
clarity in the Exchange’s rules.
Opening Sweep
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the Opening Sweep
rule in Options 3, Section 7(u) are
consistent with the Act. As discussed
125 See
126 See
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
supra note 45.
BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(12).
11OCN1
61410
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
above, the Exchange is codifying current
System behavior and providing
additional context to the rule in a
manner that is consistent with Phlx’s
Opening Sweep rule in Phlx Options 3,
Section 7(b)(6). The Exchange therefore
believes that the proposed changes
promote greater transparency in the
Exchange’s rules and consistency across
the rules of the Nasdaq affiliated options
exchanges. Specifically, because an
Opening Sweep is an IOC order
submitted by a Market Maker during the
Opening Process, the Exchange is
making clear that Opening Sweeps are
entered though SQF in the proposed
rule text. The Exchange also believes
that it is appropriate to specify that
Opening Sweeps are not subject to any
risk protections in Options 3, Section 15
(except Automated Quotation
Adjustments) because the Opening
Process itself has boundaries (notably,
the Quality Opening Market and the
Opening Quote Range) within which
orders will be executed. Finally, the
proposed language relating to Opening
Sweep participation in the Opening
Process and cancellation upon the open
merely provides additional context in
the order type rule. As noted above,
Opening Sweeps are already described
in the opening rule today in Options 3,
Section 8, and apply only during the
Opening Process.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Time in Force
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the TIF rules are
consistent with the Act. As discussed
above, the Exchange believes that
certain existing functionality currently
described as an ‘‘order type’’ in Options
3, Section 7 would be more precisely
described as a TIF attribute that
designates the basic parameters of an
order type. Relocating and centralizing
the existing TIF rules into proposed
Supplementary Material .02 to Options
3, Section 7 will therefore clearly
delineate these order attributes and
make the proposed rules easier to
navigate. Codifying the definition of
‘‘TIF’’ in proposed Supplementary
Material .02 will add greater clarity and
transparency to the Exchange’s rules in
a manner consistent with BX Options 3,
Section 7(b).
The Exchange believes that the
adjustments in proposed Supplementary
Material .02(a) to Options 3, Section 7
to add that Day orders may be entered
through FIX or OTTO will add further
granularity and clarity to the Exchange’s
rules. The proposed changes provide
additional detail about current
functionality in a manner that is
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
consistent with the level of detail in
BX’s Day order.127
The Exchange believes that the
adjustments to the relocated GTC and
GTD rules in proposed Supplementary
Material .02(b) and (c) will add further
granularity and clarity to how these
TIFs operate today. The Exchange
further believes that aligning the level of
detail in the GTD rule to the GTC rule,
as described above, is appropriate
because these two TIFs are meant to be
functionally similar except the manner
in which they persist in the System.
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the relocated IOC
rule in proposed Supplementary
Material .02(d) will promote greater
transparency in the Exchange’s rules by
providing more granularity to current
IOC functionality. Further, the changes
conform the Exchange’s IOC rule to BX’s
IOC rule, thereby promoting consistency
across the rules of the Nasdaq affiliated
options exchanges. Specifically, the
proposed changes to remove the word
‘‘limit’’ will make clear that IOC orders
may be sent as either a Market or Limit
Order today, identical to BX IOC
orders.128 The proposed changes to state
that IOC orders are not eligible for
routing, and that IOC orders may be
entered through FIX, OTTO, or SQF,
will codify current IOC behavior in a
manner that is consistent with BX’s IOC
rule.129
As it relates to the proposed changes
to memorialize the various risk
protections that are excluded from
applying to Market Maker IOC orders
entered through SQF, the Exchange
believes this is appropriate because only
Market Makers utilize SQF to enter IOC
orders. As discussed above, Market
Makers are professional traders with
more sophisticated infrastructures than
other market participants, and are able
to manage their risk through their own
risk settings in addition to the risk
protections required by the Exchange.
The Exchange will continue to apply the
specified risk protections on IOC orders
entered through FIX and OTTO, which
are used by the other market
participants. The proposed changes will
harmonize the Exchange’s IOC rule with
BX’s IOC rule.130 Further, the proposal
to add substantially similar
exclusionary language into the SQF rule
itself at Supplementary Material .03(c)
to Options 3, Section 7 will make clear
that these risk protections will not apply
to IOC orders entered through SQF.
127 See
supra note 51.
supra note 52.
129 See supra notes 53—54.
130 See supra notes 59—60.
128 See
PO 00000
Frm 00135
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
Specifying in the proposed IOC rule
that orders entered into the Exchange’s
various auction and crossing
mechanisms are considered to have a
TIF of IOC memorializes current System
behavior, and is intended to bring
greater transparency in how these order
types are handled today. As noted
above, BX currently has substantially
similar language in its IOC rule for BX
PRISM orders in BX Options 3, Section
7(b)(2).
Lastly, the Exchange believes that the
adjustments to the relocated OPG rule in
proposed Supplementary Material .02(e)
to Options 3, Section 7 will add
granularity and clarity to how OPG
orders operate, and will conform the
OPG rule with the level of detail
currently in BX’s OPG rule in BX
Options 3, Section 7(b)(1). As discussed
above, the Exchange is proposing to
enhance OPG functionality to allow
both Market and Limit OPG orders
whereas today, only Limit OPG orders
are allowed. This harmonizes OPG
functionality with BX OPG
functionality. The other modifications
to replace ‘‘opening rotation’’ with
‘‘Opening Process,’’ stating OPG orders
may not route, and indicating that OPG
orders are not subject to the protections
listed in Options 3, Section 15 (except
Size Limitation) all memorialize current
OPG behavior, and align to the current
BX OPG rule. As discussed above, the
Exchange does not apply any of the risk
protections in Options 3, Section 15
(except Size Limitation) because the
Opening Process itself has boundaries
within which orders will be executed.
Opening Process
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the Opening
Process in Options 3, Section 8 are
consistent with the Act. As discussed
above, the Exchange is proposing to
remove the current limitation that only
allows Public Customers interest to
route during the opening, and will
instead allow all market participant
interest to route. The proposed changes
will serve to more closely align the
Exchange’s Opening Process with BX’s
Opening Process. Like BX, the Exchange
believes that it will be beneficial to
provide all market participants with the
opportunity to have their interest
executed on away markets during the
Opening Process. The Exchange further
believes that the related changes to
remove references to ‘‘Public Customer’’
throughout Options 3, Section 8, and to
update the cross-cite currently pointing
to the Priority Customer priority overlay
to the more general priority rule, will
add clarity, transparency, and internal
consistency to Exchange rules regarding
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
the proposed handling of routable
interest during the Opening Process.
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to no longer round in the
direction of the previous trading day’s
closing price and simply round up to
the MPV, if the mid-point of the highest
and lowest of the Potential Opening
Prices is not expressed as a permitted
MPV, will simplify and bring greater
transparency to the Opening Process, to
the benefit of investors. Market
participants can now have a better sense
of how the Potential Opening Price will
be calculated without having to account
for the closing price of each options
series. The Exchange believes this may
promote greater efficiency in the
marketplace especially in view of the
continued growth in the number of
options today.
The Exchange further believes that the
proposed changes to replace ‘‘are
marketable against the ABBO’’ with
‘‘cross the ABBO’’ will better articulate
how the Exchange currently determines
the OQR boundaries in the scenario
specified in Options 3, Section 8(i)(3).
Auction Mechanisms
Facilitation and Solicited Order
Mechanisms
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to relocate the rule text relating
to Responses from Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 3, Section 11
into the introductory paragraph of
Options 3, Section 11, and adding that
Responses can be modified, is
consistent with the Act. The Exchange
is relocating this language into the
introductory paragraph of Options 3,
Section 11 after the definition of
‘‘Response’’ for better readability. The
proposed change to add ‘‘or modified’’
to indicate that Responses may be
canceled or modified any time prior to
execution better aligns the rule text to
current System behavior. As noted
above, the rules for the complex
Facilitation and Solicited Order
Mechanisms in Options 3, Sections
11(c)(7) and (e)(4), respectively, already
provide for this concept.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Price Improvement Mechanism
The Exchange’s proposal to amend
Options 3, Section 13(b)(4) to clarify the
current rule text by adding the words
‘‘or modified’’ after ‘‘canceled’’ is
consistent with the Act because the
additional text will make clear that a
Crossing Transaction may not be
modified unless the Counter-Side Order
is being improved during the exposure
period.
The Exchange’s proposal to add
clarifying rule text within Options 3,
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
Section 13(b)(5) which states, ‘‘Crossing
Transactions submitted at or before the
opening of trading are not eligible to
initiate an Auction and will be rejected’’
is consistent with the Act because it will
bring greater clarity to when a Crossing
Transaction is currently eligible to
initiate a PIM. The PIM considers both
the NBBO and local book for its entry
price validation and therefore requires
an opening for the PIM to begin.
The Exchange’s proposal to amend
the current PIM functionality within
Options 3, Section 13(c)(3) to permit
Improvement Orders to be canceled or
modified is consistent with the Act. The
Exchange proposes to amend this
functionality so that Improvement
Orders may be canceled or modified
similar to functionality on BX today
within Options 3, Section 13(ii)(a)(8).
Today, during the exposure period,
Improvement Orders may not be
canceled and Improvement Orders may
be modified to (i) increase the size at the
same price, or (ii) improve the price of
the Improvement Order for any size up
to the size of the Agency Order. The
modification and cancellation of an
Improvement Order through OTTO will
be similar to the manner in which a
Cancel and Replace Order would be
handled outside of the auction process.
For Improvement Orders through SQF,
the modification and cancellation of
such orders will be handled by sending
new Improvement Orders that overwrite
the existing Improvement Order with
updated price/quantity instructions.
Improvement Orders are not visible to
other auction participants, including the
Agency Order. The Exchange believes
that providing responders with
flexibility to cancel or modify their
Improvement Orders may encourage
market participants to respond to more
auctions, including PIM.
The proposal to amend Options 3,
Section 13(d)(5) to permit an auction to
automatically terminate upon the
occurrence of a trading halt with
execution solely with the Counter-Side
Order is consistent with the Act. This
functionality would be similar to rule
text within BX Options 3, Section
13(ii)(C). The Exchange believes that
utilizing the price of the Counter-Side
Order to execute the Crossing
Transaction promotes just and equitable
principles of trade, and fosters
cooperation and coordination with
persons engaged in facilitating
transactions in securities since the
Counter-Side Order has guaranteed that
an execution will occur at the same
price as the Crossing Transaction, or
better, prior to the trading halt, and
Improvement Orders offer no such
guarantee, the Counter-Side Order is the
PO 00000
Frm 00136
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61411
only valid price at which to execute the
Crossing Transactions, and the CounterSide Order is the appropriate contraside.131
The Exchange believes that the
proposed System change to adopt a new
same side execution price check for PIM
in new subsection (d)(6) of Options 3,
Section 13 is consistent with the Act. As
discussed above, this feature would be
functionally identical to BX PRISM in
BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(I). Like BX,
the proposed price check is designed to
ensure that the Exchange would not
trade at prices that would lock or cross
interest on the same side of the market
as the Agency Order where limit orders
have rested and obtained priority to
execute at that price. In the event where
a limit order arrives on the same side of
the market as the Agency Order and is
at the same or better price than the
initiating Crossing Transaction price,
the Exchange would execute the entire
PIM transaction at the initiating
Crossing Transaction price. The
execution takes place at this price
because the PIM is guaranteed an
execution and the PIM agency side
instructions would not allow an
execution to take place at a higher
(lower) price than submitted for a
buying (selling) agency side PIM order.
Considering that the limit order has
arrived either at or better on the same
side as the Agency Order than the
agency side price, the initiating Crossing
Transaction price is the only price at
which the guaranteed execution can
take place.
The Exchange’s proposal to amend
Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) to permit
Improvement Complex Orders to be
canceled or modified is consistent with
the Act. Further, similar to the proposed
change for simple PIM, the Exchange
notes that the modification and
cancellation of an Improvement
Complex Order will be similar to the
manner in which a Cancel and Replace
Order would be handled outside of the
auction process. Improvement Complex
Orders are not visible to other auction
participants, including the Agency
Complex Order. Further, similar to the
proposed changes for simple PIM, the
Exchange believes that providing
responders with flexibility to cancel or
modify their Improvement Complex
Orders may encourage market
participants to respond to more
auctions, including Complex PIM.
The Exchange’s proposal to amend
Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(iv) at new
131 The Exchange notes that trading on the
Exchange in any option contract will be halted
whenever trading in the underlying security has
been paused or halted by the primary listing
market.
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
61412
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
‘‘(D)’’ to provide that the exposure
period for a Complex PIM will
automatically terminate when a resting
Complex Order in the same complex
strategy on either side of the market
becomes marketable against the
Complex Order Book or bids and offers
for the individual legs is consistent with
the Act. The proposed changes will
codify current System behavior and will
provide greater transparency to market
participants for situations in which
early termination would occur for
Complex PIMs today. As noted above,
Complex Order Exposure currently early
terminates in similar situations, so the
proposed language for Complex PIM
closely tracks existing Complex
Exposure language in Supplementary
Material .01(b)(ii) to Options 3, Section
14.132 The Exchange believes that it is
appropriate to early terminate Complex
PIM under these circumstances for the
following reasons. When the resting
Complex Order is on the same side as
the Agency Complex Order, interest that
becomes marketable against the resting
Complex Order would also be
marketable against the Complex PIM
order. Therefore, early terminating the
Complex PIM would allow the Complex
PIM order to interact with this interest
given that the Complex PIM order is at
a superior price compared to the resting
Complex Order, thus providing an
opportunity for price improvement for
the Agency Complex Order.
Additionally, when the resting Complex
Order is on the opposite side of the
Agency Complex Order, interest that
arrives marketable against the resting
Complex Order is now at a superior
price to the Agency Complex Order. The
Exchange would therefore early
terminate in this scenario and execute
the Complex PIM order with its contra
side order because it is no longer at top
of book.
The Exchange’s proposal to relocate
the last sentence of Options 3, Section
13(e)(3) into Options 3, Section
13(e)(4)(iv) at new ‘‘(E)’’ is consistent
with the Act. This non-substantive
amendment will relocate the rule text to
132 Supplementary Material .01(b)(ii) of MRX
Options 3, Section 14 provides: ‘‘The exposure
period for a Complex Order will end immediately:
(A) upon the receipt of a Complex Order for the
same complex strategy on either side of the market
that is marketable against the Complex Order Book
or bids and offers for the individual legs; (B) upon
the receipt of a non-marketable Complex Order for
the same complex strategy on the same side of the
market that would cause the price of the exposed
Complex Order to be outside of the best bid or offer
for the same complex strategy on the Complex
Order Book; or (C) when a resting Complex Order
for the same complex strategy on either side of the
market becomes marketable against interest on the
Complex Order book or bids and offers for same
individual legs of the complex strategy.’’
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
a more logical place within the Complex
PIM rule.
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to codify existing Complex
PIM behavior in Options 3, Section
13(e)(5) to articulate that the complex
mid-way price will be rounded to the
$0.01 increment that favors the Agency
Complex Order will promote clarity and
transparency in the Exchange’s rules by
better aligning the rule text with the
current operation of the System. As
noted above, the simple PIM rule
already articulates that the mid-way
price will be rounded to the $0.01
increment that favors the Agency Order
in Options 3, Section 13(d)(4). The
rounding for Complex PIM currently
operates the same way as simple PIM in
this respect, so the proposed Complex
PIM language closely tracks the simple
PIM language.
Finally, the proposal to amend
Supplementary Material .02 to Options
3, Section 15 to add a sentence which
provides, ‘‘It will be considered a
violation of this Rule and will be
deemed conduct inconsistent with just
and equitable principles of trade and a
violation of Options 9, Section 1 if an
Electronic Access Member submits a
PIM Order (initiating an auction) and
also submits its own Improvement
Order in the same auction,’’ is
consistent with the Act. BX has a
similar prohibition within Options 3,
Section 13(iii). The proposed new rule
is designed to prevent fraudulent and
manipulative acts and practices, to
promote just and equitable principles of
trade, by providing guidance to
Members where certain behavior within
a PIM will not be considered a bona fide
transaction.
Order Price Protection
The Exchange believes that its
proposal to replace its current Limit
Order Price Protection with a similar
‘‘fat finger’’ check called Order Price
Protection in Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A) is consistent with the Act.
The proposed OPP would similarly
prevent the execution of limit orders at
prices outside pre-set numerical or
percentage parameters, and is designed
to prevent limit orders entered at clearly
unintended prices from executing in the
System to the detriment of market
participants. The proposed risk
protection is also functionally similar to
BX’s OPP in BX Options 3, Section
15(a)(1), and therefore is not novel.133
133 As noted above, the Exchange is proposing to
adopt an OPP rule that more accurately describes
the proposed functionality than BX’s current OPP
rule, so BX will align its current OPP rule to the
Exchange’s proposed rule text in a separate rule
filing.
PO 00000
Frm 00137
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
Similar to BX, the Exchange believes
that the proposed fixed dollar amount
and percentage parameters will protect
against erroneous executions, while also
allowing orders to execute within a
reasonable range.
The Exchange believes that using the
Reference BBO (i.e., better of the NBBO
or the internal market BBO) to calculate
the proposed OPP, identical to current
BX OPP functionality, will similarly
protect investors and the public interest
where the internal market BBO is better
than the NBBO.
The Exchange further believes that its
proposal to add language allowing
Exchange discretion to temporarily
deactivate OPP on an intra-day basis is
consistent with the Act. BX has
identical language today in BX Options
3, Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i), and similar to
BX, the Exchange believes that having
this discretion will be useful if the
Exchange determined that unusual
market conditions warranted
deactivation in the interest of a fair and
orderly market. Like BX, the Exchange
believes that it will be useful to have the
flexibility to temporarily disable OPP
intra-day in response to an unusual
market event (e.g., if dissemination of
data was delayed and resulted in
unreliable underlying values needed for
the Reference BBO) to maintain a fair
and orderly market. This will promote
just and equitable principles of trade
and ultimately protect investors.
Post-Only Quoting Protection
The Exchange’s proposal to adopt a
new Post-Only Quote Configuration in
Options 3, Section 15(a)(3)(C) to permit
Market Makers to prevent their quotes
from removing liquidity from the
Exchange’s order book promotes
equitable principles of trade and
protects investors and the public
interest by enhancing the risk
protections available to Market Makers.
This optional risk protection would
enable Market Maker to better manage
their risk when quoting on the
Exchange. As noted above, BX offers
identical functionality today in BX
Options 3, Section 15(c)(3).
The proposed risk protection allows
Market Makers the ability to avoid
removing liquidity from the Exchange’s
order book if their quote would
otherwise lock or cross any resting order
or quote on the Exchange’s order book
upon entry, thereby protecting investors
and the general public as Market Makers
transact a large number of orders on the
Exchange and bring liquidity to the
marketplace. Market Makers would
utilize the proposed risk protection to
avoid unintentionally taking liquidity
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
with resting interest 134 on the order
book. As a result of taking liquidity,
Market Makers would incur a taker fee
that may impact the Market Maker’s
ability to provide liquidity and meet
quoting obligations. Market Makers are
required to add liquidity on the
Exchange and, in turn, are rewarded
with lower pricing 135 and enhanced
allocations.136 Specifically, the risk
protection would permit Market Makers
to add liquidity only and avoid
removing resting interest on the order
book, which will lead to enhanced
liquidity on the Exchange and in turn
will benefit and protect investors and
the public interest through the potential
for greater volumes of orders and
executions on the Exchange.
The Exchange does not believe that
introducing this Post-Only Quote
Configuration will unfairly discriminate
among market participants. Today, all
Members may utilize the existing Add
Liquidity Order type to prevent orders
from removing liquidity from the
Exchange’s order book upon entry. The
Post-Only Quote Configuration is
available to Market Makers only as a
risk protection. Unlike other market
participants, Market Makers have
certain obligations on the market, such
as requirements to provide continuous
two-sided quotes on a daily basis 137 and
are subject to various obligations
associated with providing liquidity on
the market.138 Market Makers are
liquidity providers on the Exchange
and, therefore, are offered certain quote
risk protections noted to allow them to
manage their risk more effectively.139
The proposed Post-Only Quote
Configuration is another risk protection
afforded to Market Makers to assist them
in managing their risk while continuing
to comply with their obligations. The
Exchange notes that enhancing the
ability of Market Makers to add liquidity
and avoid taking liquidity from the
order book promotes just and equitable
principles of trade on the Exchange and
protects investors and the public
interest, thereby enhancing market
structure by allowing Market Makers to
add liquidity only. Greater liquidity
134 As noted above, this would include any repriced orders as described in the Re-Pricing Filing
as proposed Options 3, Section 5(d), ALOs as
described in proposed Options 3, Section 7(n), and
any re-priced quotes as described in Options 3,
Section 4(b)(6). As discussed above, ALOs may reprice.
135 See Options 7, Section 3.
136 See Options 3, Section 10.
137 See Options 2, Section 5(e).
138 See Options 2, Section 4.
139 Options 3, Section 15(a)(3) currently sets forth
the Anti-Internalization and Quotation Adjustments
Protections that are available today to Market
Makers.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
benefits all market participants by
providing more trading opportunities
and attracting greater participation by
Market Makers. Also, an increase in the
activity of Market Makers in turn
facilitates tighter spreads.
Kill Switch
The Exchange does not believe that
the proposed decommission of the GUI
Kill Switch for order cancellation will
affect the protection of investors or the
public interest or the maintenance of a
fair and orderly market because no
Members have used the GUI Kill Switch
risk protection in 2022.140 The
Exchange does not charge any fees for
the GUI Kill Switch. In addition, the
Exchange notes that the use of this tool
is completely optional, and the
Exchange will continue to offer
substantially similar Kill Switch
functionality through FIX and OTTO.
As set forth in the Kill Switch rule, the
GUI Kill Switch allows for the
cancellation and restriction of orders for
the requested Identifier(s) on a user or
group level, whereas the port Kill
Switch allows for cancellation and
restriction of orders for the requested
Identifier(s) on a user level.141 While the
GUI Kill Switch had more optionality
around how Members may combine the
Kill Switch request by Identifier(s), no
Members have used the GUI Kill Switch
risk protection this year. Furthermore,
Members will retain the ability to
contact market operations staff to
manually purge their orders from the
market. In addition, the Exchange will
continue to implement System-enforced
risk mechanisms that automatically
remove orders for the Member once
certain pre-set thresholds or conditions
are met (i.e., market wide risk protection
and cancel on disconnect).
Also, the Exchange believes that the
low usage rate for the GUI Kill Switch
does not warrant the continuous
resources necessary for System support
of such tools. As a result, the Exchange
believes that the proposal will remove
impediments to and perfect the
mechanism of a free and open market
and a national market system by
allowing the Exchange to reallocate
System capacity and resources currently
used to maintain this functionality to
the development and maintenance of
other business initiatives and risk
management products.
As noted above, the Exchange
previously amended its rules to
decommission the quote removal Kill
140 As noted above, the Exchange has provided
notice of the decommission to all Members via
Options Trader Alert. See Options Trader Alert
#2022–30.
141 See Options 3, Section 17(a)(1) and (2).
PO 00000
Frm 00138
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61413
Switch that was available to Market
Makers through the GUI.142 Similar to
the GUI Kill Switch for quote removal,
the Exchange has found that no
Members use the GUI Kill Switch to
cancel their orders, but rather, utilize
other means to purge their existing
orders from the System. The Exchange
therefore believes that eliminating the
GUI Kill Switch all together (including
for orders as proposed herein) will
streamline the Exchange’s risk
protection offerings in a manner that
reflects Member use.
Data Feeds and Trade Information
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the current data
feed offerings in Options 3, Section
23(a) are consistent with the Act.
Specifically, the Exchange believes that
the proposed changes to its Depth of
Market Feed to provide full depth-ofmarket information will serve to more
closely align the information provided
on the Exchange’s Depth of Market Feed
with that of BX’s Depth of Market Feed
in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1),
thereby ensuring a more consistent
technology offering across the Nasdaq
affiliated options exchanges. The
Exchange also believes that the
modified Depth of Market Feed will
help to protect a free and open market
by providing additional data to the
marketplace. The Exchange further
believes that the proposed changes to
add more specificity around what
would be provided in the opening/
reopening order imbalance information,
and to correct an erroneous reference to
‘‘ISE’’ in the Depth of Market Feed rule
will promote transparency and clarity in
the Exchange’s rules.
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the Order Feed
around what type of information would
be available on this data feed offering,
as further described above, will promote
clarity and transparency in the
Exchange’s rules. Furthermore, the
proposed data elements in the Order
Feed are based on data elements that
currently exist on other markets. For
instance, the specificity around what
would be provided in the opening/
reopening order imbalance information,
as well as the auction and exposure
notifications are identical to the content
within BX’s Depth of Market Feed in BX
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1). As noted
above, the Attributable Order content is
similar to the data elements on Cboe’s
current multicast PITCH feed.143
The Exchange believes that the
proposed changes to the existing Top
142 See
143 See
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
supra note 99.
supra note 103.
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
61414
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
Quote Feed to rebrand into the Top
Feed, to no longer provide information
for opening price, daily trading volume,
and high and low prices for the day,
will serve to further align the
Exchange’s Top Feed with BX’s Top
Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(2),
thereby ensuring a more consistent
technology offering across the Nasdaq
affiliated options exchanges.
The proposed changes to the Trades
Feed to no longer provide information
for opening price, daily trading volume,
and high and low prices for the day are
intended to align to the proposed
changes to the Top Feed described
above. The Exchange believes that
removing this language will promote
clarity and transparency in the
Exchange’s rules.
The proposed changes to the Spread
Feed to provide full depth-of-book
information rather than at the first five
price levels are intended to align to the
proposed changes to the Depth of
Market Feed described above. The
proposed full depth language will also
be substantially similar to the full depth
language in BX’s Depth of Market Feed
in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1) and in
the Exchange’s proposed Depth of
Market Feed in proposed Options 3,
Section 23(a)(1), except the proposed
language herein will be tailored to
complex functionality. Furthermore, the
proposed Attributable Complex Order
content is similar to the content
currently on Cboe’s Complex Multicast
PITCH feed.144 The Exchange believes
that the modified Spread Feed will help
to protect a free and open market by
providing additional data to the
marketplace. The Exchange also
believes that the proposed changes to
reorganize and incorporate existing
concepts in the Spread Feed rule a
manner that is more consistent with the
other amended data feed rules in
Options 3, Section 23(a) will make the
rules easier to navigate for market
participants.
The Exchange believes that it is
consistent with the Act to no longer
offer TradeInfo when the Exchange
migrates over the enhanced Nasdaq
functionality, as there is a lack of
demand from Members.145 The
Exchange does not assess a fee for
TradeInfo. As noted above, Members
use FIX, FIX DROP, and CTI to obtain
order information currently available in
TradeInfo, and to cancel orders through
FIX. The Exchange further believes that
144 See
supra note 108.
noted above, the Exchange provided notice
of the decommission to all Members through an
Options Trader Alert. See Options Trader Alert
#2022–29.
145 As
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
the proposed decommission of
TradeInfo will remove impediments to
and perfect the mechanism of a free and
open market and a national market
system by allowing the Exchange to
reallocate System capacity and
resources currently used to maintain
this functionality to the development
and maintenance of other business
initiatives and risk management
products.
The Exchange’s proposal to eliminate
TradeInfo pricing from Options 7,
Section 6(ii)(3) in its entirety is
reasonable, equitable, and not unfairly
discriminatory because TradeInfo would
no longer be available to any Member.
It is reasonable to remove all references
to TradeInfo pricing from the
Exchange’s Pricing Schedule as the
Exchange is removing this functionality
from its Rulebook. As discussed above,
the Exchange does not assess a fee for
TradeInfo today. Additionally, it is
equitable and not unfairly
discriminatory to remove the references
to TradeInfo pricing from the Pricing
Schedule because no Member would be
able to utilize this functionality once it
is removed from the System.
Optional Risk Protections
The Exchange believes that
introducing the optional quantity and
notional value risk protections as
described above will protect investors
and the public interest, and maintain
fair and orderly markets, by providing
market participants with another tool to
manage their order risk. As noted above,
BX offers functionally identical optional
risk protections in BX Options 3,
Section 28.146 In addition, providing
Members with more tools for managing
risk will facilitate transactions in
securities because Members will have
more confidence that risk protections
are in place. As a result, the new
functionality has the potential to
promote just and equitable principles of
trade.
B. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement on Burden on Competition
The Exchange does not believe that
the proposed rule change will impose
any burden on competition not
necessary or appropriate in furtherance
of the purposes of the Act. The
Exchange operates in a competitive
market and regularly competes with
other options exchanges for order flow.
146 As noted above, while the proposed rule text
in Options 3, Section 28 adds more granularity,
including around how orders are rejected when the
value thresholds for the options risk protections are
exceeded, the Exchange understands that the BX
optional risk protections operate in the same
manner.
PO 00000
Frm 00139
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
As discussed above, the Exchange is replatforming its System in connection
with the technology migration to
enhanced Nasdaq functionality, which
the Exchange believes would promote
competition among options exchanges
by potentially attracting additional
order flow to the Exchange with the
enhanced trading platform.
As it relates to the elimination of fees
for flash functionality and TradeInfo
from Options 7, the Exchange believes
that its proposal does not impose an
undue burden on competition because
the flash functionality and TradeInfo
would no longer be available to any
Members.
The basis for the majority of the
proposed rule changes are the rules of
the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges,
which have been previously filed with
the Commission as consistent with the
Act. As it relates to bulk messaging for
quotes as proposed in Options 3,
Section 4(b)(3), the Exchange notes that
Cboe similarly allows for bulk
messaging in Cboe Rule 1.1, except Cboe
also allows bulk messaging for orders,
unlike the Exchange. As it relates to the
proposal in Options 3, Section 7(g)(4) to
codify the refresh features into the
Exchange’s Reserve Order rule, the
Exchange notes that Cboe’s Reserve
Order functionality has similar refresh
features in Cboe Rule 5.6(c). As it relates
to the proposal in Options 3, Section
23(a) to add Attributable Order and
Attributable Complex Order content in
the Order Feed and Spread Feed,
respectively, Cboe currently has similar
data elements available on its Multicast
PITCH feed and Complex Multicast
PITCH feed.147
The proposed rule changes are based
on the following rules of the Nasdaq
affiliated exchanges:
• The Market Order proposal in
Options 3, Section 7(a) will be
materially identical to BX’s Market
Orders in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5).
• The ISO proposal in Options 3,
Section 7(b)(5) will be substantially
similar to BX’s ISO in BX Option 3,
Section 7(a)(6). Unlike BX, the
Exchange’s ISO proposal will not refer
to how ISOs may be entered on the
Exchange as the Exchange intends
address that in a separate rule filing.
• The Exchange’s AON proposal will
be substantially similar to BX’s
Contingency Order rule in BX Options
3, Section 7(a)(4)(A) (except BX’s rule
also describes Minimum Quantity
Orders, which the Exchange does not
offer today) and BX’s AON rule in BX
Options 3, Section 7(a)(7).
147 See
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
supra notes 103 and 108.
11OCN1
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
• The Stop Order proposal in Options
3, Section 7(d) will be substantially
similar to Phlx Options 3, Section
7(b)(4), except Phlx does not currently
explicitly state that Phlx Stop Orders
may only be entered through FIX
because Phlx only offers one order entry
protocol (FIX), unlike the Exchange,
which offers two (FIX and OTTO).
• The Stop Limit Order proposal in
Options 3, Section 7(e) will be
substantially similar to Phlx Options 3,
Section 7(b)(4)(A), except Phlx does not
currently explicitly state that Phlx Stop
Limit Orders may only be entered
through FIX for the same reasons stated
for Stop Orders above.
• The Preferenced Order proposal in
Options 3, Section 7(l) will be
materially identical to Phlx’s Directed
Order rule in Phlx Options 3, Section
7(b)(11).
• The ALO proposal in Options 3,
Section 7(n) will be materially identical
to BX ALOs in BX Options 3, Section
7(a)(12).
• The Opening Sweep proposal in
Options 3, Section 7(u) will be
materially identical to the Phlx Opening
Sweep in Phlx Options 3, Section
7(b)(6).
• The Day order proposal in
Supplementary Material .02(a) to
Options 3, Section 7 will be
substantially similar to BX Options 3,
Section 7(b)(3), except BX’s rule does
not refer to OTTO because BX does not
offer OTTO functionality today.
• The IOC proposal in Supplementary
Material .02(d) to Options 3, Section 7
will be substantially similar to BX’s IOC
in BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2), except
the BX rule does not refer to OTTO or
Complex Order Price Protection as BX
does not offer these features today.
• The OPG proposal in
Supplementary Material .02(e) to
Options 3, Section 7 will be materially
identical to BX’s OPG in BX Options 3,
Section 7(b)(1).
• The Opening Process proposal in
Options 3, Section 8 to allow all market
participant interest to route will be
identical to BX’s Opening Process in BX
Options 3, Section 8.
• The following proposed changes to
PIM are based on BX PRISM: (1)
proposed Options 3, Section 13(b)(5)
will be materially identical to BX
Options 3, Section 13(i)(E); (2) proposed
Options 3, Section 13(c)(3) will be
materially identical to BX Options 3,
Section 13(ii)(A)(8); (3) proposed
Options 3, Section 13(d)(5) will be
functionally similar to BX Options 3,
Section 13(ii)(C); (4) proposed Options
3, Section 13(d)(6) will be functionally
similar to BX Options 3, Section
13(ii)(I); (5) proposed Options 3, Section
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
13(e)(4)(ii) will be functionally similar
to BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8)
with respect to the ability to cancel or
modify PIM responses (Improvement
Orders); and (6) proposed
Supplementary Material .02 to Options
3, Section 13 will be materially identical
to BX Options 3, Section 13(iii).
• The proposed OPP risk protection
in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A) will be
functionally similar to BX OPP in BX
Options 3, Section 15(a)(1).148
• The proposed Post-Only Quote
Configuration in Options 3, Section
15(a)(3)(C) will be functionally identical
to the BX Post-Only Quote
Configuration in BX Options 3, Section
15(c)(3).
• The Depth of Market Feed proposal
in Option 3, Section 23(a)(1) will be
substantially similar to the BX Depth of
Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section
23(a)(1), except the Exchange will not
offer auction and exposure notifications
on its Depth of Market Feed like BX
does today.
• The Order Feed proposal in Options
3, Section 23(a)(2) will contain data
elements that are identical to those on
BX’s Depth of Market Feed in BX
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), specifically
around what would be provided in the
opening/reopening order imbalance
information (i.e., the size of matched
contracts and size of the imbalance),
and auction and exposure notifications.
• The Top Feed proposal in Options
3, Section 23(a)(3) will be substantially
similar to the BX Top Feed in BX
Options 3, Section 23(a)(2), except the
Exchange will continue to provide
aggregated size information unlike BX.
• The Spread Feed proposal in
Options 3, Section 23(a)(5) will contain
full depth language that is substantially
similar to BX’s Depth of Market Feed in
BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), except
the proposed language in the Spread
Feed will be tailored to complex
functionality.
• The proposed optional quantity and
notional value risk protections in
Options 3, Section 28 will be
functionally identical to the protections
in BX Options 3, Section 28.149
The Exchange reiterates that the
proposed rule change is being proposed
in the context of the technology
migration to enhanced Nasdaq
148 As noted above, BX will file a separate rule
change to conform its OPP rule to the Exchange’s
proposed rule.
149 As noted above, while the proposed rule text
in Options 3, Section 28 adds more granularity,
including around how orders are rejected when the
value thresholds for the options risk protections are
exceeded, the Exchange understands that the BX
optional risk protections operate in the same
manner.
PO 00000
Frm 00140
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
61415
functionality. The Exchange further
believes the proposed rule change will
benefit Members by providing a more
consistent technology offering, as well
as consistent rules, for market
participants on the Nasdaq affiliated
options exchanges. In addition, the
proposed rule change relates to adding
clarity and consistency in the
Exchange’s Rulebook, and are designed
to reduce any potential investor
confusion as to the features and
applicability of certain functionality
presently available on the Exchange.
The Exchange does not believe that
the proposed rule change will impose
any burden on intra-market competition
that is not necessary or appropriate in
furtherance of the purposes of the Act,
as the majority of the proposed changes
will apply to all Members. As it relates
to the proposed rule change relating to
bulk message functionality, while the
Exchange currently offers this
functionality to Market Makers only,
bulk messaging is intended to provide
Market Makers with an additional tool
to meet their various quoting obligations
in a manner they deem appropriate. As
such, the Exchange believes that this
functionality may facilitate Market
Makers’ provision of liquidity, thereby
benefiting all market participants
through additional execution
opportunities at potentially improved
prices. Furthermore, while the Exchange
will offer the proposed Post-Only Quote
Configuration to Market Makers only,
the proposed risk protection will
enhance the ability of Market Makers to
add liquidity and avoid removing
liquidity from the Exchange’s order
book in the manner described above.
Greater liquidity benefits all market
participants by providing more trading
opportunities and attracting greater
participation by Market Makers. The
Exchange also does not believe that the
proposed decommission of the GUI Kill
Switch for order cancellation will
impose any burden on intra-market
competition that is not necessary or
appropriate in furtherance of the
purposes of the Act. As discussed
above, the Exchange previously
amended its rules to decommission the
quote removal Kill Switch that was
available to Market Makers through the
GUI.150 The Exchange therefore believes
that eliminating the GUI Kill Switch for
order cancellation will streamline the
Exchange’s risk protection offerings in a
manner that reflects Member use. The
Exchange will continue to offer
substantially similar Kill Switch
functionality through FIX and OTTO.
150 See
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
supra note 99.
11OCN1
61416
Federal Register / Vol. 87, No. 195 / Tuesday, October 11, 2022 / Notices
C. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement on Comments on the
Proposed Rule Change Received From
Members, Participants, or Others
No written comments were either
solicited or received.
III. Date of Effectiveness of the
Proposed Rule Change and Timing for
Commission Action
Because the foregoing proposed rule
change does not: (i) significantly affect
the protection of investors or the public
interest; (ii) impose any significant
burden on competition; and (iii) become
operative for 30 days from the date on
which it was filed, or such shorter time
as the Commission may designate, it has
become effective pursuant to Section
19(b)(3)(A)(iii) of the Act 151 and
subparagraph (f)(6) of Rule 19b–4
thereunder.152
At any time within 60 days of the
filing of the proposed rule change, the
Commission summarily may
temporarily suspend such rule change if
it appears to the Commission that such
action is necessary or appropriate in the
public interest, for the protection of
investors, or otherwise in furtherance of
the purposes of the Act. If the
Commission takes such action, the
Commission shall institute proceedings
to determine whether the proposed rule
should be approved or disapproved.
IV. Solicitation of Comments
Interested persons are invited to
submit written data, views, and
arguments concerning the foregoing,
including whether the proposed rule
change is consistent with the Act.
Comments may be submitted by any of
the following methods:
Electronic Comments
• Use the Commission’s internet
comment form (https://www.sec.gov/
rules/sro.shtml); or
• Send an email to rule-comments@
sec.gov. Please include File Number SR–
MRX–2022–18 on the subject line.
khammond on DSKJM1Z7X2PROD with NOTICES
Paper Comments
• Send paper comments in triplicate
to Secretary, Securities and Exchange
Commission, 100 F Street NE,
Washington, DC 20549–1090.
All submissions should refer to File
Number SR–MRX–2022–18. This file
151 15
U.S.C. 78s(b)(3)(A)(iii).
152 17 CFR 240.19b–4(f)(6). In addition, Rule 19b–
4(f)(6) requires a self-regulatory organization to give
the Commission written notice of its intent to file
the proposed rule change at least five business days
prior to the date of filing of the proposed rule
change, or such shorter time as designated by the
Commission. The Exchange has satisfied this
requirement.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
17:37 Oct 07, 2022
Jkt 259001
number should be included on the
subject line if email is used. To help the
Commission process and review your
comments more efficiently, please use
only one method. The Commission will
post all comments on the Commission’s
internet website (https://www.sec.gov/
rules/sro.shtml). Copies of the
submission, all subsequent
amendments, all written statements
with respect to the proposed rule
change that are filed with the
Commission, and all written
communications relating to the
proposed rule change between the
Commission and any person, other than
those that may be withheld from the
public in accordance with the
provisions of 5 U.S.C. 552, will be
available for website viewing and
printing in the Commission’s Public
Reference Room, 100 F Street NE,
Washington, DC 20549, on official
business days between the hours of
10:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. Copies of the
filing also will be available for
inspection and copying at the principal
office of the Exchange. All comments
received will be posted without change.
Persons submitting comments are
cautioned that we do not redact or edit
personal identifying information from
comment submissions. You should
submit only information that you wish
to make available publicly. All
submissions should refer to File
Number SR–MRX–2022–18 and should
be submitted on or before November 1,
2022.
For the Commission, by the Division of
Trading and Markets, pursuant to delegated
authority.153
J. Matthew DeLesDernier,
Deputy Secretary.
[FR Doc. 2022–21984 Filed 10–7–22; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 8011–01–P
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE
COMMISSION
[Release No. 34–95972; File No. SR–
NYSENAT–2022–22]
Self-Regulatory Organizations; NYSE
National, Inc.; Notice of Filing and
Immediate Effectiveness of Proposed
Rule Change To Amend the
Connectivity Fee Schedule
October 4, 2022.
Pursuant to Section 19(b)(1) 1 of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934
(‘‘Act’’) 2 and Rule 19b–4 thereunder,3
notice is hereby given that on
153 17
CFR 200.30–3(a)(12).
U.S.C. 78s(b)(1).
2 15 U.S.C. 78a.
3 17 CFR 240.19b–4.
1 15
PO 00000
Frm 00141
Fmt 4703
Sfmt 4703
September 21, 2022, NYSE National,
Inc. (‘‘NYSE National’’ or the
‘‘Exchange’’) filed with the Securities
and Exchange Commission (the
‘‘Commission’’) the proposed rule
change as described in Items I, II, and
III below, which Items have been
prepared by the self-regulatory
organization. The Commission is
publishing this notice to solicit
comments on the proposed rule change
from interested persons.
I. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Terms of Substance of
the Proposed Rule Change
The Exchange proposes to amend the
Connectivity Fee Schedule related to
colocation to remove obsolete text. The
proposed rule change is available on the
Exchange’s website at www.nyse.com, at
the principal office of the Exchange, and
at the Commission’s Public Reference
Room.
II. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Purpose of, and
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule
Change
In its filing with the Commission, the
self-regulatory organization included
statements concerning the purpose of,
and basis for, the proposed rule change
and discussed any comments it received
on the proposed rule change. The text
of those statements may be examined at
the places specified in Item IV below.
The Exchange has prepared summaries,
set forth in sections A, B, and C below,
of the most significant parts of such
statements.
A. Self-Regulatory Organization’s
Statement of the Purpose of, and the
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule
Change
1. Purpose
The Exchange proposes to amend the
Connectivity Fee Schedule related to
colocation to remove Partial Cabinet
Solution bundles Options A and B as
obsolete.4
The Exchange recently deleted the
service ‘‘LCN Access—1 Gb Circuit’’
from the list of types of services
available in colocation, due to the lack
of User demand for 1 Gb LCN ports.5 In
4 The Exchange is an indirect subsidiary of
Intercontinental Exchange, Inc. (‘‘ICE’’). Each of the
Exchange’s affiliates New York Stock Exchange
LLC, NYSE American LLC, NYSE Arca, Inc., and
NYSE Chicago, Inc. (the ‘‘Affiliate SROs’’) has
submitted substantially the same proposed rule
change to propose the changes described herein.
See SR–NYSE–2022–45, SR–NYSEAMER–2022–43,
SR–NYSEARCA–2022–64, and SR–NYSECHX–
2022–22.
5 See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 95362
(July 25, 2022), 87 FR 45828 (July 29, 2022) (SR–
NYSENAT–2022–12).
E:\FR\FM\11OCN1.SGM
11OCN1
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 87, Number 195 (Tuesday, October 11, 2022)]
[Notices]
[Pages 61391-61416]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 2022-21984]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
[Release No. 34-95982; File No. SR-MRX-2022-18]
Self-Regulatory Organizations; Nasdaq MRX, LLC; Notice of Filing
and Immediate Effectiveness of Proposed Rule Change To Amend Its Rules
in Connection With a Technology Migration to Enhanced Nasdaq
Functionality
October 4, 2022.
Pursuant to Section 19(b)(1) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
(``Act''),\1\ and Rule 19b-4 thereunder,\2\ notice is hereby given that
on September 30, 2022, Nasdaq MRX, LLC (``MRX'' or ``Exchange'') filed
with the Securities and Exchange Commission (``SEC'' or ``Commission'')
the proposed rule change as described in Items I, II, and III, below,
which Items have been prepared by the Exchange. The Commission is
publishing this notice to solicit comments on the proposed rule change
from interested persons.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 15 U.S.C. 78s(b)(1).
\2\ 17 CFR 240.19b-4.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Self-Regulatory Organization's Statement of the Terms of Substance
of the Proposed Rule Change
The Exchange proposes to amend its rules in connection with a
technology migration to enhanced Nasdaq, Inc. (``Nasdaq'')
functionality.
The text of the proposed rule change is available on the Exchange's
website at https://listingcenter.nasdaq.com/rulebook/mrx/rules, at the
principal office of the Exchange, and at the Commission's Public
Reference Room.
II. Self-Regulatory Organization's Statement of the Purpose of, and
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule Change
In its filing with the Commission, the Exchange included statements
concerning the purpose of and basis for the proposed rule change and
discussed any comments it received on the proposed rule change. The
text of these statements may be examined at the places specified in
Item IV below. The Exchange has prepared summaries, set forth in
sections A, B, and C below, of the most significant aspects of such
statements.
A. Self-Regulatory Organization's Statement of the Purpose of, and
Statutory Basis for, the Proposed Rule Change
1. Purpose
In connection with a technology migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality that will result in higher performance, scalability, and
more robust architecture, the Exchange proposes to amend its rules to
adopt certain trading functionality currently utilized at Nasdaq
affiliate options exchanges. As further discussed below, the Exchange
is proposing to adopt such functionality substantially in the same form
as currently on the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges, while
retaining certain intended differences between it and its affiliates.
The Exchange also proposes a number of changes to memorialize existing
functionality, add more granularity in its rules to describe how
existing functionality operates today, and to harmonize the Exchange's
rules where appropriate with the rules of its affiliated options
exchanges by using consistent language to describe identical
functionality.
The Exchange intends to begin implementation of the proposed rule
change in Q4 2022. MRX would commence its implementation with a limited
symbol migration and continue to migrate symbols over several weeks.
The Exchange will issue an Options
[[Page 61392]]
Trader Alert to Members to provide notification of the symbols that
will migrate and the relevant dates.
Routing Changes
In connection with the technology migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality, the Exchange recently amended Options 5 (Order
Protections and Locked and Crossed Markets) in order to harmonize its
routing functionality to that of Nasdaq BX, Inc. (``BX'').\3\ As part
of this harmonization, the Routing Filing included proposals to adopt
or harmonize routing strategies on the Exchange that are substantially
identical to BX, (i.e., DNR, FIND, and SRCH), and eliminate existing
Exchange routing functionality that BX does not offer today (e.g.,
flash functionality,\4\ and Sweep Orders \5\).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3\ Specifically, the Exchange's affiliate, Nasdaq ISE, LLC
(``ISE'') amended ISE Options 5, which MRX Options 5 incorporates by
reference. See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 94897 (May 12,
2022), 87 FR 30294 (May 18, 2022) (SR-ISE-2022-11) (``Routing
Filing''). As a result, the amendments to ISE Options 5 in the
Routing Filing also amended MRX Options 5.
\4\ Today, the Exchange's flash functionality permits certain
eligible incoming orders to first be exposed at the National Best
Bid or Offer (``NBBO'') to all Members for execution at the NBBO
price before that order is routed to another market for execution.
See Supplementary Material .02 to Options 5, Section 2.
\5\ A Sweep Order is a limit order that is to be executed in
whole or in part on the Exchange and the portion not so executed
shall be routed pursuant to Supplementary Material .05 to Options 5,
Section 2 to Eligible Exchange(s) for immediate execution as soon as
the order is received by the Eligible Exchange(s). Any portion not
immediately executed by the Eligible Exchange(s) shall be canceled.
If a Sweep Order is not marketable when it is submitted to the
Exchange, it shall be canceled. See Options 3, Section 7(s).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
In connection with the proposed changes in the Routing Filing, the
Exchange now proposes to make corresponding changes to the following
Rules within Options 3 to account for the proposed amendments to
Options 5: Section 5 (Entry and Display of Single-Leg Orders), Section
7 (Types of Orders and Orders and Quote Protocols), Section 9 (Trading
Halts), Section 10 (Priority of Quotes and Orders), and Section 11
(Auction Mechanisms).\6\ First, the Exchange proposes to remove the
following rule text in Options 3, Section 5(b)(1) relating to flash
functionality and Non-Customer order handling in lieu of using flash
functionality: ``Orders that are not automatically executed will be
handled as provided in Supplementary Material .02 to Options 5, Section
2; provided that Members may specify that a Non-Customer order should
instead be accepted and immediately cancelled automatically by the
System \7\ at the time of receipt.'' With the removal of flash
functionality in the Routing Filing, the foregoing rule text would no
longer be necessary. In connection with this change, the Exchange will
renumber current Section 5(b)(2) as (b)(1). Second, the Exchange
proposes to delete similar flash-related language in Options 3, Section
5(d) that currently provides: ``Orders that are not automatically
executed will be handled as provided in Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 5, Section 2; provided that Members may specify that a Non-
Customer order should instead be cancelled automatically by the System
at the time of receipt.''
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\6\ The Exchange notes that ISE proposed identical amendments in
ISE Options 3 as part of the Routing Filing.
\7\ The term ``System'' means the electronic system operated by
the Exchange that receives and disseminates quotes, executes orders
and reports transactions. See Options 1, Section (a)(49).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Third, the Exchange proposes to delete references to do-not-route
orders \8\ and Sweep Orders in Options 3, Section 7(m) and (s),
respectively, and reserve those Rules. As discussed in the Routing
Filing, the Exchange is eliminating these order types (and for do-not-
route orders, eliminating as an order type and describing these instead
as a routing strategy) in order to align with BX's current offerings.
Fourth, the Exchange proposes to add a new Supplementary Material .04
to Options 3, Section 7, which would set forth the new routing
strategies that are substantially identical to BX's current routing
strategies, as further discussed in the Routing Filing. Specifically,
new Supplementary Material .04 would provide: ``Routing Strategies.
Orders may be entered on the Exchange with a routing strategy of FIND
or SRCH, or, in the alternative, an order may be marked Do-Not-Route
(``DNR'') as provided in Options 5, Section 4 through FIX only.'' \9\
The addition of this sentence will make clear which routing strategies
may be utilized when submitting an order type and will provide a
citation to the routing rule in Options 5, Section 4 for ease of
reference.\10\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\8\ A do-not-route order is a market or limit order that is to
be executed in whole or in part on the Exchange only. Due to prices
available on another options exchange (as provided in Options 5
(Order Protection; Locked and Crossed Markets)), any balance of a
do-not-route order that cannot be executed upon entry, or placed on
the Exchange's limit order book, will be automatically cancelled.
See Options 3, Section 7(m).
\9\ ``Financial Information eXchange'' or ``FIX'' is an
interface that allows Members and their Sponsored Customers to
connect, send, and receive messages related to orders and auction
orders to the Exchange. Features include the following: (1)
execution messages; (2) order messages; (3) risk protection triggers
and cancel notifications; and (4) post trade allocation messages.
See Supplementary Material .03(a) to Options 3, Section 7. The
Exchange notes that FIX is the only order entry protocol on the
Exchange that permits routing today.
\10\ Routing options may be combined with all available order
types and times-in-force (``TIFs''), with the exception of orders
and TIFs whose terms are inconsistent with the terms of a particular
routing option.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fifth, the Exchange proposes to amend subparagraph (d)(2) of
Options 3, Section 9. Among other things, this Rule describes the
processing of Market Orders exposed at the NBBO pursuant to
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 5, Section 2 after a trading
halt. This rule text is no longer necessary with the elimination of
flash functionality in the Routing Filing. Sixth, the Exchange proposes
to amend Options 3, Section 10(a)(ii) \11\ to remove a reference to
flash functionality that will no longer exist with the proposed changes
in the Routing Filing. The Exchange also proposes to renumber Options
3, Section 10(a)(i) and (ii) as Options 3, Section 10(a)(1) and (2) to
conform the numbering in that Rule, and correct a citation within
Section 10(a)(ii) (proposed Section 10(a)(2)) from Options 3, Section 3
to Options 3, Section 10.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\11\ Options 3, Section 10(a)(ii) currently provides that this
rule does not apply to the Block Order Mechanism described within
Options 3, Section 11(a), the Facilitation Mechanism described
within Options 3, Section 11(b), the Solicited Order Mechanism
described within Options 3, Section 11(d), the Price Improvement
Mechanism described within Options 3, Section 13, orders described
within Options 3, Section 12 or an exposure period as provided in
Options 5, Section 2 at Supplementary Material .02, unless Options
3, Section 3 is specifically referenced within MRX Rules applicable
to the aforementioned functionality.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seventh, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section 11(g)
\12\ to
[[Page 61393]]
remove references to the flash functionality, which will no longer
exist with the proposed changes in the Routing Filing. Eighth, the
Exchange proposes to amend its Pricing Schedule at Options 7 to remove
all references to pricing related to the flash functionality. In
particular, the Exchange proposes to delete the definition of Flash
Order in Options 7, Section 1 and to delete the language in Options 7,
Section 5.B that currently provides that marketing fees are waived for
Flash Order responses.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\12\ Options 3, Section 11(g) currently provides that an auction
in the Block Order Mechanism at Options 3, Section 11(a),
Facilitation Mechanism at Options 3, Section 11(b), Solicited Order
Mechanism at Options 3, Section 11(d), or Price Improvement
Mechanism at Options 3, Section 13(d), respectively, or an exposure
period as provided in Supplementary Material .02 to Options 5,
Section 2, for an option series may occur concurrently with a
Complex Order Exposure Auction at Supplementary Material .01 to
Options 3, Section 14, Complex Facilitation Auction at Options 3,
Section 11(c), Complex Solicited Order Auction at Options 3, Section
11(e), or Complex Price Improvement Mechanism auction at Options 11,
Section 13(e), respectively, for a Complex Order that includes that
series. To the extent that there are concurrent Complex Order and
single leg auctions involving a specific option series, each auction
will be processed sequentially based on the time the auction
commenced. At the time an auction concludes, including when it
concludes early, the auction will be processed pursuant to Options
3, Section 11(a), (b), (d), or Section 13(a) or Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 5, Section 2, as applicable, for the single
option, or pursuant to Supplementary Material .01 to Options 3,
Section 14, Options 3, Section 11(c), 11(e), Options 3, Section
13(e), as applicable, for the Complex Order, except as provided for
at Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(vi).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bulk Message
The Exchange proposes to codify existing functionality that allows
Market Makers to submit their quotes to the Exchange in block
quantities as a single bulk message. In other words, a Market Maker may
submit a single message to the Exchange, which may contain bids and
offers in multiple series. The Exchange does not permit bulk messaging
for orders today. The Exchange has historically provided Market Makers
with information regarding bulk messaging in its publicly available
technical specifications.\13\ To promote greater transparency, the
Exchange is seeking to codify this functionality in its rulebook.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section 4(b)(3)
to memorialize that quotes may be submitted as a bulk message. The
Exchange also proposes to add a definition of ``bulk message'' in new
subparagraph (i) of Options 3, Section 4(b)(3), which will provide that
a bulk message means a single electronic message submitted by a Market
Maker to the Exchange which may contain a specified number of
quotations as designated by the Exchange.\14\ The bulk message,
submitted via SQF,\15\ may enter, modify, or cancel quotes. Bulk
messages are handled by the System in the same manner as it handles a
single quote message.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\13\ See https://www.nasdaq.com/MRX_SQF (specifying for bulk
quoting of up to 200 quotes per quote block message). The
specifications note in other places the manner in which a Member can
send such quote block messages.
\14\ See id. As noted above, quote bulk messages can presently
contain up to 200 quotes per message. This is the maximum amount
that is permitted in a bulk message. The Exchange would announce any
change to these specifications in an Options Technical Update
distributed to all Members.
\15\ ``Specialized Quote Feed'' or ``SQF'' is an interface that
allows Market Makers to connect, send, and receive messages related
to quotes, Immediate-or-Cancel Orders, and auction responses to the
Exchange. Features include the following: (1) options symbol
directory messages (e.g., underlying and complex instruments); (2)
system event messages (e.g., start of trading hours messages and
start of opening); (3) trading action messages (e.g., halts and
resumes); (4) execution messages; (5) quote messages; (6) Immediate-
or-Cancel Order messages; (7) risk protection triggers and purge
notifications; (8) opening imbalance messages; (9) auction
notifications; and (10) auction responses. The SQF Purge Interface
only receives and notifies of purge requests from the Market Maker.
Market Makers may only enter interest into SQF in their assigned
options series. See Supplementary Material .03(c) to Options 3,
Section 7.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange notes that other exchanges like Cboe Options Exchange
(``Cboe'') currently offer similar bulk messaging functionality that
allow their market participants to submit block quantity quotes in a
single electronic message.\16\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\16\ See definition of ``bulk message'' in Cboe Rule 1.1. Unlike
Cboe, which also allows bulk messaging for orders, the Exchange's
bulk message functionality only applies to quotes as discussed
above.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Order Types
The Exchange proposes to make several enhancements to certain order
types in Options 3, Section 7 in connection with the technology
migration to Nasdaq enhanced functionality. Specifically in connection
with the migration, the Exchange proposes to: (1) introduce an intra-
day cancel timer feature for Market Orders,\17\ (2) eliminate non-
Immediate-or-Cancel (``IOC'') \18\ Intermarket Sweep Orders
(``ISOs''),\19\ (3) introduce BX-like re-pricing to Add Liquidity
Orders (``ALOs''),\20\ and (4) allow Market Orders to be entered as
Opening Only (``OPG'') \21\ orders (currently only allowed for Limit
Orders).\22\ As discussed below, the proposed enhancements are intended
to align with existing BX functionality. The Exchange also proposes to
add more granularity on how certain order types currently operate on
the Exchange today, codify existing order type functionality, and to
relocate related rule text within Options 3, Section 7 for better
readability. Except with respect to the order type enhancements
specified above, none of the proposed order type rule changes will
amend current functionality. Rather, these changes are designed to
bring greater transparency as to the applicability of certain order
types currently available on the Exchange, and to provide greater
consistency between the rules of the Exchange and its affiliates.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\17\ A market order is an order to buy or sell a stated number
of options contracts that is to be executed at the best price
obtainable when the order reaches the Exchange. See Options 3,
Section 7(a).
\18\ An IOC order must be executed in whole or in part upon
receipt. Any portion not so executed is to be treated as cancelled.
See Options 3, Section 7(b)(3). As discussed later in this filing,
the Exchange will relocate the IOC rule into Supplementary Material
.02 to Options 3, Section 7.
\19\ An ISO is a limit order that meets the requirements of
Options 5, Section 1(h). See Options 3, Section 7(b)(5).
\20\ An Add Liquidity Order is a limit order that is to be
executed in whole or in part on the Exchange (i) only after being
displayed on the Exchange's limit order book; and (ii) without
routing any portion of the order to another market center. Members
may specify whether an Add Liquidity Order shall be cancelled or re-
priced to the minimum price variation above the national best bid
price (for sell orders) or below the national best offer price (for
buy orders) if, at the time of entry, the order (i) is executable on
the Exchange; or (ii) the order is not executable on the Exchange,
but would lock or cross the national best bid or offer. If at the
time of entry, an Add Liquidity Order would lock or cross one or
more non-displayed orders on the Exchange, the Add Liquidity Order
shall be cancelled or re-priced to the minimum price variation above
the best non-displayed bid price (for sell orders) or below the best
non-displayed offer price (for buy orders). An Add Liquidity Order
will only be re-priced once and will be executed at the re-priced
price. An Add Liquidity Order will be ranked in the Exchange's limit
order book in accordance with Options 3, Section 10. See Options 3,
Section 7(n).
\21\ An OPG order is a Limit Order that can be entered for the
opening rotation only. See Options 3, Section 7(o). As discussed
later in this filing, the Exchange will relocate the OPG rule into
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7.
\22\ A Limit Order is an order to buy or sell a stated number of
options contracts at a specified price or better. See Options 3,
Section 7(b).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Market Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend the definition of Market Orders in
Options 3, Section 7(a) to introduce a cancel timer feature, which will
allow Members to designate Market Orders that do not execute after a
certain period of time to be cancelled back to the Member.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to add that Members can designate
their Market Orders not executed after a pre-established period of
time, as established by the Exchange,\23\ will be cancelled back to the
Member, once an options series has opened for trading. BX currently has
an identical timer feature for BX Market Orders.\24\ Similar to BX, the
proposed timer would be available once the intra-day trading session
begins for an options series, as the Exchange already has a separate
opening delay timer that provides protection to the market during the
Opening Process. In particular, the Exchange would cancel or route
orders (consistent with the Member's instructions) if an options series
has not opened before the conclusion of the opening delay timer.\25\ As
such, the
[[Page 61394]]
Exchange is proposing that the pre-established period of time for the
proposed timer feature would commence once the intra-day trading
session begins for that options series. In other words, while the
opening process is on-going, and the intra-day trading session has not
commenced, the pre-established period of time for the proposed timer
feature would not commence. Further, the Exchange proposes to note that
Market Orders on the order book would be immediately cancelled if an
options series is halted, provided the Member designated the
cancellation of Market Orders.\26\ The proposed changes are intended to
make clear that in the event there is a Market Order in a zero bid
market with the Market Order was resting on the order book, the Member
has an option to designate the cancellation of that Market Order
pursuant to the proposed cancel timer feature. In this case, those
Market Orders to sell, which were resting on the order book, would
immediately cancel upon a trading halt instead of waiting until the end
of the pre-established timer period. BX has identical language
governing its Market Orders today.\27\ Like BX, the Exchange believes
that the proposed intra-day timer feature will provide additional
flexibility for Members that wish to cancel unexecuted Market Orders
after a certain period of time. Lastly, the Exchange proposes a non-
substantive change to capitalize the term ``market orders'' in the
first sentence of Options 3, Section 7(a) for consistency with the
proposed rule text.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\23\ The Exchange will initially set the pre-established period
of time at 4 seconds, identical to BX. This specification will be
set out in the MRX system settings document on a publicly available
website. The Exchange would issue an Options Trader Alert notifying
all Members if it determined to amend that timeframe.
\24\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5).
\25\ See Options 3, Section 8(k).
\26\ Members may make the designation to cancel their Market
Orders through their FIX and OTTO port settings.
\27\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Intermarket Sweep Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend the ISO rule in Options 3, Section
7(b)(5), which currently provides that an ISO is limit order that meets
the requirements of Options 5, Section 1(h).\28\ As amended, the ISO
rule will provide:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\28\ Options 5, Section 1(h) provides that an ISO is a limit
order for an options series that, simultaneously with the routing of
the ISO, one or more additional ISOs, as necessary, are routed to
execute against the full displayed size of any Protected Bid, in the
case of a limit order to sell, or any Protected Offer, in the case
of a limit order to buy, for the options series with a price that is
superior to the limit price of the ISO. A Member may submit an
Intermarket Sweep Order to the Exchange only if it has
simultaneously routed one or more additional Intermarket Sweep
Orders to execute against the full displayed size of any Protected
Bid, in the case of a limit order to sell, or Protected Offer, in
the case of a limit order to buy, for an options series with a price
that is superior to the limit price of the Intermarket Sweep Order.
An ISO may be either an Immediate-Or-Cancel Order or an order that
expires on the day it is entered.
An Intermarket Sweep Order (``ISO'') is a limit order that meets
the requirements of Options 5, Section 1(h). Orders submitted to the
Exchange as ISO are not routable and will ignore the ABBO and trade
at allowable prices on the Exchange. ISOs must have a TIF
designation of IOC. ISOs may not be submitted during the Opening
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Process.
The proposed rule text is substantially similar to BX's ISO rule in
BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(6).\29\ The Exchange is also proposing to
add that ISOs may not be submitted during the Opening Process to
reflect current System handling. The Exchange notes that BX similarly
prohibits the submission of ISOs before the market opens and therefore
proposes to add a similar level of detail in the Exchange's ISO rule.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\29\ BX's ISO rule also currently states that ``ISOs may be
entered on the Order Book or into the PRISM Mechanism pursuant to
Options 3, Section 13(ii)(K).'' See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(6).
The Exchange notes that it intends to file a separate rule filing to
add similar language as BX relating to how ISOs may be entered on
the Exchange.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other than the stipulation that ISOs must have a TIF \30\
designation of IOC, the proposed language does not amend the current
ISO functionality but rather is intended to add more granularity and
more closely align the ISO rule with BX's ISO rule. The Exchange does
note that in connection with the system migration, the Exchange
proposes to amend the current ISO functionality to only allow ISOs to
be entered as IOC. Today, Options 5, Section 1(h) provides that an ISO
may either be an IOC or an order that expires on the day it is
entered.\31\ The Exchange is proposing to require ISOs to be entered as
IOC, which would cause an ISO to cancel in whole or in part upon
receipt if the ISO does not execute or does not entirely execute,
because an ISO is generally used when trying to sweep a price level
across multiple exchanges in an effort to post the balance of an order
without locking an away market. The Exchange therefore believes that
ISOs have a limited purpose and should be cancelled if they do not
execute or do not entirely execute. As noted above, the proposal will
align to current BX functionality that similarly only allows ISOs to be
entered as IOC on BX.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\30\ As discussed later in this filing, the Exchange is
proposing to codify the definition of ``Time in Force'' or ``TIF''
to mean the period of time that the System will hold an order for
potential execution. See proposed Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 3, Section 7.
\31\ Because MRX Options 5 incorporates ISE Options 5 by
reference, ISE will file a subsequent ISE rule filing to amend
Options 5 to remove the language in Options 5, Section 1(h) that
currently allows ISOs to be entered as an order that expires on the
day it is entered.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
All-or-None Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend the All-Or-None (``AON'') Order rule
in Options 3, Section 7(c), which currently provides that an AON Order
is a limit or market order that is to be executed in its entirety or
not at all, and that an AON Order may only be entered as an IOC Order.
As amended, the AON rule will provide:
An All-Or-None (``AON'') Order is a limit or market order that is
to be executed in its entirety or not at all. An AON Order may only be
entered as an Immediate-or-Cancel Order. AON Orders will only execute
against multiple, aggregated orders if the executions would occur
simultaneously. AON Orders may not be submitted during the Opening
Process.
With the proposed changes, the Exchange is not amending current AON
functionality; rather, it is memorializing current System behavior in a
manner consistent with its affiliates. Today, AON Orders have a size
contingency (i.e., executed in its entirety at the entered size or not
at all) and must be IOC. The Exchange is specifying that AON Orders
will execute against multiple, aggregated orders only if the executions
would occur simultaneously to ensure that AON Orders are executed at
the specified size while also honoring the priority of all other orders
on the order book. The Exchange is adopting this rule text for AON
orders to align to substantially similar language on BX.\32\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\32\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(4)(A) (describing Minimum
Quantity Orders and AON Orders as Contingency Orders). Unlike BX,
the Exchange does not currently offer Minimum Quantity Orders.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange notes that the handling of AONs as described in the
proposed rule text in Options 3, Section 7(c) is consistent with the
Exchange's allocation methodology in Options 3, Section 10. The
additional detail makes clear that because of the size contingency of
AON Orders, those orders must be satisfied simultaneously to avoid any
priority conflict on the order book, which considers current displayed
NBBO prices to avoid locked and crossed markets as well as trade-
throughs.
The Exchange is also proposing to add that AON orders may not be
submitted during the Opening Process to reflect current System
handling. The Exchange notes that BX similarly prohibits the submission
of AON orders before the market opens and therefore proposes to add a
similar level of detail in the Exchange's AON rule.\33\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\33\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(7).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61395]]
Stop Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend its Stop Order rule in Options 3,
Section 7(d), which presently provides that a stop order is an order
that becomes a market order when the stop price is elected. A stop
order to buy is elected when the option is bid or trades on the
Exchange at, or above, the specified stop price. A stop order to sell
is elected when the option is offered or trades on the Exchange at, or
below, the specified stop price. The Exchange now proposes to add that
a Stop Order shall be cancelled if it is immediately electable upon
receipt. Stop Orders allow Members increased control and flexibility
over their transactions and the prices at which they are willing to
execute an order. The purpose of a Stop Order is to not execute upon
entry, and instead rest in the System until the market reaches a
certain price level, at which time the order could be executed. A Stop
Order that is immediately electable upon receipt would therefore negate
the purpose of the Stop Order, so the Exchange would cancel such orders
today. The Exchange believes that this ensures Members are able to use
Stop Orders to achieve their intended purpose. The proposed changes
codify current Stop Order handling and are intended to better align the
Exchange's Stop Order rule with that of its affiliate, Phlx.\34\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\34\ See Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes to specify that Stop Orders may only be
entered through FIX. This is how Stop Orders are handled today. Because
the Exchange offers two order entry protocols today (FIX and OTTO),\35\
the Exchange believes that adding this detail will make clear that Stop
Orders are only available to be entered through one of these order
entry protocols and reduce any potential confusion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\35\ ``Ouch to Trade Options'' or ``OTTO'' is an interface that
allows Members and their Sponsored Customers to connect, send, and
receive messages related to orders, auction orders, and auction
responses to the Exchange. Features include the following: (1)
options symbol directory messages (e.g., underlying and complex
instruments); (2) system event messages (e.g., start of trading
hours messages and start of opening); (3) trading action messages
(e.g., halts and resumes); (4) execution messages; (5) order
messages; (6) risk protection triggers and cancel notifications; (7)
auction notifications; (8) auction responses; and (9) post trade
allocation messages. See Supplementary Material .03(b) to Options 3,
Section 7.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stop Limit Orders
The Exchange proposes to amend its Stop Limit Order rule in Options
3, Section 7(e), which presently provides that a stop limit order is an
order that becomes a limit order when the stop price is elected. A stop
limit order to buy is elected when the option is bid or trades on the
Exchange at, or above, the specified stop price. A stop limit order to
sell is elected when the option is offered or trades on the Exchange
at, or below, the specified stop price. The Exchange now proposes to
add that a Stop Limit Order shall be cancelled if it is immediately
electable upon receipt. The Exchange would cancel these orders today
for the same reasons discussed above for Stop Orders. The proposed
changes codify current Stop Limit Order handling and are intended to
better align the Exchange's Stop Limit Order rule with that of
Phlx.\36\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\36\ See Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4)(A).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes to specify that Stop Limit Orders may
only be entered through FIX. This is how Stop Limit Orders are handled
today. For the same reasons discussed above for Stop Orders, the
Exchange believes that adding this detail will make clear that Stop
Limit Orders are only available to be entered through the specified
order entry protocol and reduce any potential confusion.
Cancel and Replace Orders
The Exchange proposes to relocate the rule text governing Cancel
and Replace Orders from Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3,
Section 7 into Options 3, Section 7(f). The Exchange also proposes non-
substantive, clarifying changes to the relocated rule text to update
the incorrect cross-cites therein to the System's price or other
reasonability checks. The Exchange also proposes to amend the following
portion of the rule, which currently provides: ``The replacement order
will retain the priority of the cancelled order, if the order posts to
the Order Book, provided the price is not amended, size is not
increased, or in the case of Reserve Orders,\37\ size is not changed.''
The Exchange proposes to make clear that in the case of Reserve Orders,
a change in price will also result in a change of priority for the
replacement order. The Exchange also proposes to clarify that the
reference to the Reserve Order's size in this Rule is referring to both
displayed and non-displayed size. As amended, the rule will provide:
``The replacement order will retain the priority of the cancelled
order, if the order posts to the Order Book, provided the price is not
amended, or size is not increased. In the case of Reserve Orders, the
replacement order will retain the priority of the cancelled order, if
the order posts to the Order Book, provided the price is not amended or
size (displayed and non-displayed) is not changed.'' The proposed
changes will aid market participants in locating this order type in the
main body of the rule, and add more granularity around how the Exchange
will treat the cancellation and replacement of Reserve Orders.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\37\ As discussed later in this filing, a Reserve Order is
defined in Options 3, Section 7(g) as a Limit Order that contains
both a displayed portion and a non-displayed portion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reserve Orders
As described in Options 3, Section 7(g), the Exchange offers
Members a Reserve Order, which is a Limit Order that contains both a
displayed portion and a non-displayed portion. Both the displayed and
non-displayed portions of a Reserve Order are available for potential
execution against incoming marketable orders. A non-marketable Reserve
Order will rest on the order book. The non-displayed portion of a
Reserve Order will be available for execution only after all displayed
interest at that price has been executed. Both the displayed and the
non-displayed portions of a Reserve Order will be ranked initially by
the specified limit price and time of entry, and both the displayed and
non-displayed portions of a Reserve Order will trade in accordance with
the priority and allocation provisions in Options 3, Section 10.
When the displayed portion of a Reserve Order has been decremented,
in whole or in part, it will be refreshed from the non-displayed
portion of the resting Reserve Order. If the displayed portion is
refreshed in part, the new displayed portion will include the
previously displayed portion. Upon any refresh, the entire displayed
portion of the order will be ranked at the specified limit price,
assigned a new entry time (i.e., the time that the newly displayed
portion of the order was refreshed), and given priority in accordance
with Options 3, Section 10. Any remaining non-displayed portion of the
order will receive the same time stamp as the newly displayed portion
of the order.
The Exchange now proposes to enhance the Reserve Order rule by
providing more granularity in how Members may elect to refresh the
display quantity for the Reserve Order. The Exchange is not proposing
to modify the current functionality of Reserve Orders, but rather
proposes to augment the definition to clarify current System behavior.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to make clear that Reserve Orders
may be entered with an instruction for the displayed portion of the
order to be refreshed: (A) upon full execution of the displayed portion
or upon any partial execution; and (B) up
[[Page 61396]]
to the initial size of the displayed portion or with a random refresh
quantity within a range determined by the Member.\38\ The Exchange
believes that this refresh feature for Reserve Orders provides more
flexibility and opportunities for Members to add displayed liquidity to
the Exchange. The Exchange believes that the proposed changes would add
transparency to the operation of Reserve Orders, without altering
current functionality. The Exchange notes that other options exchanges
like Cboe currently offer similar refresh features on their Reserve
Order functionality.\39\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\38\ See proposed Options 3, Section 7(g)(4). The Exchange will
also renumber the paragraphs within this rule accordingly. As it
relates to the refresh quantity range, Members must designate a
range for the random refresh election when they submit the Reserve
Order if they elect a random refresh, otherwise the Reserve Order
would be refreshed at a quantity equal to the initial size of the
displayed portion. The range must be set at a number between 1 and
the initial displayed quantity.
\39\ See Cboe Rule 5.6(c) (setting forth the random
replenishment and fixed replenishment features for Reserve Orders).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Finally, the Exchange proposes non-substantive, technical changes
in Options 3, Section 7(g) to reformat the paragraph numbering, make a
corrective change to ``non-displayed portions'' in proposed paragraph
(6), and update a cross-cite in proposed paragraph (6).
Attributable Orders
As described in Options 3, Section 7(h), the Exchange currently
offers Attributable Orders, which allow Members to voluntarily display
their firm IDs on the orders. The rule also provides the Exchange with
flexibility to announce which Exchange Systems and class of securities
for which the Attributable Order would be available.\40\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\40\ Today, Attributable Orders are not available for the
Facilitation, Solicited Order, and Price Improvement Mechanisms.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange now proposes to delete existing text that refers to
class of securities in Options 3, Section 7(h). Attributable Orders are
available for all classes of securities today. The Exchange is
therefore deleting this language as inaccurate. The Exchange also
proposes a corrective change herein to ``an Option Trader Alert.''
Customer Cross Orders
Customer Cross Orders are currently defined in Options 3, Section
7(i). The Exchange proposes to add that such orders will trade in
accordance with Options 3, Section 12(a). This is a non-substantive
amendment to add a cross-reference to Section 12(a), which currently
describes in detail how a Customer Cross Order would execute on the
Exchange.
Qualified Contingent Cross Orders
Qualified Contingent Cross (``QCC'') Orders are currently defined
in Options 3, Section 7(j). The Exchange proposes a non-substantive,
technical change to add a reference to ``QCC'' in the first sentence of
this rule. The Exchange also proposes to add that QCC Orders will trade
in accordance with Options 3, Section 12(c). This is a non-substantive
amendment to add a cross-reference to Section 12(c), which currently
describes in detail how a QCC Order would execute on the Exchange.
The Exchange further proposes to specify that QCC Orders may only
be entered through FIX. This is how QCC Orders are handled today.
Because the Exchange offers two order entry protocols today (FIX and
OTTO), the Exchange believes that adding this detail will make clear
that QCC Orders are only available to be entered through one of these
order entry protocols and reduce any potential confusion.
Preferenced Orders
The Exchange proposes to include the following definition of a
Preferenced Order in Options 3, Section 7(l) for ease of reference: ``A
Preferenced Order is as described in Options 2, Section 10.'' This is
not a new order type, as Preferenced Orders are currently described in
Options 2, Section 10. While this order type is not currently listed in
the order type rule in Options 3, Section 7, the Exchange believes that
it will be useful to market participants to have order types
centralized within one rule. Phlx similarly lists out Directed Orders
(akin to Preferenced Orders) in its order type rule in Phlx Options 3,
Section 7(b)(11).
Add Liquidity Orders
Add Liquidity Orders (``ALOs'') are currently defined in Options 3,
Section 7(n). Today, the Exchange offers ALOs to provide market
participants with greater control over the circumstances in which their
orders are executed. ALOs are Limit Orders that will only be executed
as a ``maker'' on the Exchange (i.e., when the Member is providing
liquidity). Members can choose whether an ALO that is executable on the
Exchange upon entry (or that is not executable on the Exchange upon
entry, but locks or crosses the NBBO) will be cancelled or re-priced to
one MPV above the national best bid (for sell orders) or below the
national best offer (for buy orders). If at the time of entry, an ALO
would lock or cross one or more non-displayed orders on the Exchange,
the ALO will be cancelled or re-priced to one MPV above the best non-
displayed bid price (for sell orders) or below the best non-displayed
offer price (for buy orders).\41\ Today, an ALO will only be re-priced
once and will be executed at the re-priced price. The Exchange notes
that without the ability to re-price an ALO in the foregoing manner,
under certain circumstances, an incoming ALO could execute against a
displayed or non-displayed order resting on the Exchange's limit order
book, which would be in direct contravention with the purpose of an ALO
(to provide liquidity, not take liquidity).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\41\ As discussed in more detail below, the Exchange will amend
this sentence to say ``orders or quotes'' to codify existing ALO
behavior.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As part of a concurrent rule filing, the Exchange is proposing to
adopt a re-pricing mechanism identical to current BX re-pricing
functionality \42\ to avoid certain orders from locking or crossing an
away market's price.\43\ In connection with the proposed adoption of
the BX-like re-pricing mechanism in Options 3, Section 5(d) in the Re-
Pricing Filing, the Exchange now proposes to make related changes to
the ALO rule in Options 3, Section 7(n). In particular, the Exchange
proposes that if an ALO would not lock or cross an order or quote on
the System but would lock or cross the NBBO, the order will be handled
pursuant to Options 3, Section 5(d), which will set forth the new BX-
like re-pricing mechanism for non-routable orders.\44\ As noted in
Options 3, Section 7(n), ALOs are inherently non-routable. Accordingly,
the Exchange is proposing to handle ALOs in a consistent manner with
the new re-pricing mechanism. Because the new mechanism will allow for
continuous re-pricing as discussed above, the Exchange also proposes to
remove the current limitation in the
[[Page 61397]]
ALO rule stipulating that these orders will only be re-priced once and
executed at the re-priced price. The proposed order handling for ALOs
will be functionally identical to ALO handling on BX today.\45\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\42\ Today, BX re-prices certain orders to avoid locking and
crossing away markets, consistent with its Trade-Through compliance
and Locked or Crossed Markets obligations. See BX Options 3, Section
5(d). See also Securities Exchange Act Release No. 89476 (August 4,
2020), 85 FR 48274 (August 10, 2020) (SR-BX-2020-017) (describing BX
re-pricing mechanism in BX Options 3, Section 5).
\43\ See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 95807 (September
16, 2022), 87 FR 57933 (September 22, 2022) (SR-MRX-2022-16) (``Re-
Pricing Filing''). Specifically in the Re-Pricing Filing, the
Exchange is proposing to adopt the following language in Options 3,
Section 5(d), which will be identical to BX Options 3, Section 5(d):
An order that is designated by a Member as non-routable will be re-
priced in order to comply with applicable Trade-Through and Locked
and Crossed Markets restrictions. If, at the time of entry, an order
that the entering party has elected not to make eligible for routing
would cause a locked or crossed market violation or would cause a
trade-through violation, it will be re-priced to the current
national best offer (for bids) or the current national best bid (for
offers) and displayed at one minimum price variance above (for
offers) or below (for bids) the national best price.
\44\ Id.
\45\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(12). See also Securities
Exchange Act Release No. 93896 (January 4, 2022), 87 FR 1231
(January 10, 2022) (SR-BX-2021-054), which introduced ALOs on BX.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange further proposes a clarifying change in the ALO rule
that would not amend current system behavior. The Exchange proposes to
add ``or quotes'' to make clear that if at the time of entry, an ALO
would lock or cross one or more non-displayed orders or quotes on the
Exchange, the ALO will be cancelled or re-priced to one MPV above the
best non-displayed bid price (for sell orders) or below the best non-
displayed offer price (for buy orders).
Finally, the Exchange proposes to add that ALOs may only be
submitted when an options series is open for trading to make clear that
an ALO would not be accepted during the Opening Process when the order
book is not available. The proposed rule text is consistent with
current functionality, so the Exchange is codifying current ALO
behavior with this change and adding the same level of detail currently
in BX's ALO rule.\46\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\46\ Id.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As amended, Options 3, Section 7(n) will provide:
An Add Liquidity Order is a limit order that is to be executed
in whole or in part on the Exchange (i) only after being displayed
on the Exchange's limit order book; and (ii) without routing any
portion of the order to another market center. Members may specify
whether an Add Liquidity Order shall be cancelled or re-priced to
the minimum price variation above the national best bid price (for
sell orders) or below the national best offer price (for buy orders)
if, at the time of entry, the order (i) is executable on the
Exchange; or (ii) the order is not executable on the Exchange, but
would lock or cross the national best bid or offer. If at the time
of entry, an Add Liquidity Order would lock or cross one or more
non-displayed orders or quotes on the Exchange, the Add Liquidity
Order shall be cancelled or re-priced to the minimum price variation
above the best non-displayed bid price (for sell orders) or below
the best non-displayed offer price (for buy orders). Notwithstanding
the aforementioned, if an Add Liquidity Order would not lock or
cross an order or quote on the System but would lock or cross the
NBBO, the order will be handled pursuant to Options 3, Section 5(d).
An Add Liquidity Order will be ranked in the Exchange's limit order
book in accordance with Options 3, Section 10. Add Liquidity Orders
may only be submitted when an options series is open for trading.
QCC With Stock Orders
The Exchange proposes a non-substantive change to correct a cross-
cite in the QCC with Stock Order rule in Options 3, Section 7(t). The
current citation to Options 3, Section 12(c) in the description of this
order type should instead be Options 3, Section 12(e).
Opening Sweep
Opening Sweeps are currently defined in Options 3, Section 7(u) as
a Market Maker order submitted for execution against eligible interest
in the System during the Opening Process pursuant to Options 3, Section
8(b)(1). The Exchange proposes to replace the current definition with
the following: ``An Opening Sweep is a one-sided order entered by a
Market Maker through SQF for execution against eligible interest in the
System during the Opening Process. This order type is not subject to
any protections listed in Options 3, Section 15, except for Automated
Quotation Adjustments. The Opening Sweep will only participate in the
Opening Process pursuant to Options 3, Section 8(b)(1) and will be
cancelled upon the open if not executed.''
The proposed rule text is consistent with current functionality, so
the Exchange is providing additional context to the Opening Sweep as
currently described in Options 3, Section 8(b) and codifying current
Opening Sweep behavior with this change. Specifically, because an
Opening Sweep is an IOC order submitted by a Market Maker during the
Opening Process, the Exchange is making clear in the proposed rule text
that this order type is entered through SQF.\47\ The Exchange is also
specifying that Opening Sweeps are not subject to any risk protections
in Options 3, Section 15 (except Automated Quotation Adjustments)
because the Opening Process itself has boundaries (notably, the Quality
Opening Market \48\ and the Opening Quote Range \49\) within which
orders will be executed. As it relates to the proposed language
relating to Opening Sweep participation in the Opening Process and
cancellation upon the open, the Exchange notes that this concept is not
new as Opening Sweeps are already described in Options 3, Section 8
today and apply only during the Opening Process. The language merely
provides additional context to the order type.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\47\ See Supplementary Material .03(c) of Options 3, Section 7,
which notes that SQF is an interface that allows Market Makers to
submit IOC orders.
\48\ A ``Quality Opening Market'' is a bid/ask differential
applicable to the best bid and offer from all Valid Width Quotes
defined in a table to be determined by the Exchange and published on
the Exchange's website. The calculation of Quality Opening Market is
based on the best bid and offer of Valid Width Quotes. The
differential between the best bid and offer are compared to reach
this determination. The allowable differential, as determined by the
Exchange, takes into account the type of security (for example,
Penny versus non-Penny Interval Program issue), volatility, option
premium, and liquidity. The Quality Opening Market differential is
intended to ensure the price at which the Exchange opens reflects
current market conditions. See Options 3, Section 8(a)(7).
\49\ The Opening Quote Range represents the outer boundaries at
which the Exchange may open. See Options 3, Section 8(i).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange notes that the Opening Sweep is functionally identical
to the Opening Sweep on Phlx,\50\ so the proposed language will
harmonize the Exchange's rule with the current Phlx rule.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\50\ See Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(6).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time in Force
Today, the Exchange notes that certain functionality is described
as an ``order type'' in Options 3, Section 7, but would be more
precisely described as a TIF attribute that may be added to a
particular order type. Accordingly, the Exchange proposes to codify the
term ``TIF'' in proposed Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3,
Section 7. The proposed TIF definition will be identical to the TIF
definition in BX Options 3, Section 7(b). The Exchange also proposes to
relocate various rules into Supplementary Material .02 to centralize
the TIFs that are available on the Exchange today. As proposed, the
rule text will provide:
.02 Time in Force. The term ``Time in Force'' or ``TIF'' shall
mean the period of time that the System will hold an order for
potential execution, and shall include:
(a) Day. An order to buy or sell entered with a TIF of ``DAY,''
which, if not executed, expires at the end of the day on which it
was entered. All orders by their terms are Day orders unless
otherwise specified. Day orders may be entered through FIX or OTTO.
(b) Good-Till-Canceled. An order to buy or sell entered with a
TIF of ``GTC'' that remains in force until the order is filled,
canceled or the option contract expires; provided, however, that GTC
orders will be canceled in the event of a corporate action that
results in an adjustment to the terms of an option contract. GTC
orders may be entered through FIX.
(c) Good-Till-Date. An order to buy or sell entered with a TIF
of ``GTD,'' which, if not executed, will be cancelled at the sooner
of the end of the expiration date assigned to the order, or the
expiration of the series; provided, however, that GTD orders will be
canceled in the event of a corporate action that results in an
adjustment to the terms of an option contract. GTD orders may be
entered through FIX.
[[Page 61398]]
(d) Immediate-or-Cancel. An order entered with a TIF of ``IOC''
that is to be executed in whole or in part upon receipt. Any portion
not so executed is to be treated as cancelled.
(1) Orders entered with a TIF of IOC are not eligible for
routing.
(2) IOC orders may be entered through FIX, OTTO or SQF, provided
that an IOC order entered by a Market Maker through the SQF protocol
will not be subject to the (A) Order Price Protection, Market Order
Spread Protection, and Size Limitation Protection as defined in
Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A), (1)(B), and (2)(B) respectively, for
single leg orders, or (B) Complex Order Price Protection as defined
in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1) for Complex Orders.
(3) Block Orders, Facilitation Orders, Complex Facilitation
Orders, SOM Orders, Complex SOM Orders, PIM Orders, Complex PIM
Orders, QCC Orders, QCC Complex Orders, Customer Cross Orders, and
Customer Cross Complex Orders are considered to have a TIF of IOC.
By their terms, these orders will be: (1) executed either on entry
or after an exposure period, or (2) cancelled.
(e) Opening Only. An Opening Only (``OPG'') order is entered
with a TIF of ``OPG.'' This order can only be executed in the
Opening Process pursuant to Options 3, Section 8. Any portion of the
order that is not executed during the Opening Process is cancelled.
OPG orders may not route. This order type is not subject to any
protections listed in Options 3, Section 15, except Size Limitation.
The Exchange is relocating rule text governing Day orders from
Options 3, Section 7(l) into Supplementary Material .02(a) to specify
that orders may be entered with a TIF of DAY. The Exchange also
proposes to include additional detail that Day orders may be entered
through FIX or OTTO. This is how Day orders operate today, and the
proposed rule text merely adds the same level of detail currently in
BX's Day order rule.\51\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\51\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(3). BX's rule does not refer
to OTTO because BX does not offer OTTO functionality today.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange is relocating rule text governing Good-Till-Canceled
(``GTC'') orders from Options 3, Section 7(r) into Supplementary
Material .02(b) to specify that orders may be entered with a TIF of
GTC. The Exchange also proposes to include additional detail that GTC
orders may be entered through FIX. This articulates current GTC
behavior.
The Exchange is relocating rule text governing Good-Till-Date
(``GTD'') orders from Options 3, Section 7(p) into Supplementary
Material .02(c) to specify that orders may be entered with a TIF of
GTD. The Exchange also proposes a number of changes that do not modify
current GTD functionality, but are intended to align to the GTC rule
described above. Today, GTC and GTD orders are intended to be
functionally similar except GTC generally persists until it is
cancelled by the Member and GTD generally persists until the assigned
date. Accordingly, the Exchange seeks to add a similar level of detail
to the GTD rule as it is proposing in the GTC rule above. First, the
Exchange proposes to remove the word ``limit'' from the relocated GTD
rule text. Similar to GTC orders, GTD orders can also be sent as Market
Orders (in addition to Limit Orders) today. The proposed changes will
therefore align the rule text with current functionality. Second, the
Exchange proposes to add that GTD orders will be canceled in the event
of a corporate action that results in an adjustment to the terms of an
option contract. This language is copied from current GTC rule text and
articulates current GTD behavior. Third, the Exchange proposes to
include additional detail that GTD orders may be entered through FIX.
This mirrors the proposed changes for GTC orders and articulates
current GTD behavior.
The Exchange is relocating rule text governing IOC orders from
Options 3, Section 7(b)(3) into Supplementary Material .02(d) to
Options 3, Section 7 to specify that orders may be entered with a TIF
of IOC. The Exchange also proposes a number of changes to conform the
Exchange's IOC rule with that of BX. None of the proposed changes
modify current Exchange IOC functionality. First, the Exchange proposes
to remove the word ``limit'' from the relocated IOC rule text in
Supplementary Material .02(d). Today, IOC orders may be sent as either
a Market Order or Limit Order. Eliminating the word ``limit'' from the
proposed IOC rule will therefore align the rule text with current
functionality.\52\ Second, the Exchange proposes to memorialize current
IOC behavior in Supplementary Material .02(d)(1) by stating that orders
entered with a TIF of IOC are not eligible for routing.\53\ Third, the
Exchange proposes to codify current IOC behavior in Supplementary
Material .02(d)(2) by stating that IOC orders may be entered through
FIX, OTTO or SQF.\54\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\52\ BX similarly allows both Market Orders and Limit Orders to
be entered as IOC. See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2). The Exchange
is not specifying Market and Limit Orders in the relocated IOC rule
text for consistency with the other TIFs in proposed Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7.
\53\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(A) for identical
language.
\54\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B) for substantially
similar language. BX's rule does not refer to OTTO because BX does
not offer OTTO ports today.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fourth, the Exchange proposes to note in the same section that an
IOC order entered by a Market Maker through SQF will not be subject to
the (A) Order Price Protection,\55\ Market Order Spread Protection,\56\
and Size Limitation Protection \57\ as defined in Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A), (1)(B), and (2)(B), respectively, for single leg orders,
or (B) Complex Order Price Protection \58\ as defined in Options 3,
Section 16(c)(1) for Complex Orders.\59\ Today, the IOC rule explicitly
excludes the Limit Order Price Protection and Size Limitation
Protection from applying to IOC orders entered through SQF. As
discussed later in this filing, the current Limit Order Price
Protection will be replaced by a similar risk management tool called
the Order Price Protection that will be identical to BX, so the
Exchange will likewise reflect that change in the proposed IOC rule.
The proposed change to exclude the Market Order Spread Protection from
applying to IOC orders entered through SQF is not a change to IOC
current functionality, but rather, a change to align the rule with
current System behavior and with BX IOC rule.\60\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\55\ The current IOC rule references the Limit Order Price
Protection as set forth in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A). As
discussed later in this filing, the Exchange is proposing to replace
the existing Limit Order Price Protection with a similar risk
management tool called Order Price Protection. See proposed Options
3, Section 15(a)(1)(A).
\56\ Market Orders will be rejected if the NBBO is wider than a
preset threshold at the time the order is received by the System.
Market Order Spread Protection shall not apply to the Opening
Process or during a trading halt. The Exchange may establish
different thresholds for one or more series or classes of options.
See Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(B).
\57\ There is a limit on the number of contracts an incoming
order or quote may specify. Orders or quotes that exceed the maximum
number of contracts are rejected. The maximum number of contracts,
which shall not be less than 10,000, is established by the Exchange
from time-to-time. See Options 3, Section 15(a)(2)(B).
\58\ This risk protection is currently called the Limit Order
Price Protection in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1). The Exchange is
renaming this risk protection in a concurrent filing to the Complex
Order Price Protection. See SR-MRX-2022-3P.
\59\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B) for substantially
similar language. BX's rule does not refer to the Complex Order
Price Protection because BX does not offer complex functionality
today.
\60\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(B).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange notes while it generally only permits orders
(including IOC orders) to be entered into its two order entry
protocols, FIX and OTTO, it does permit the entry of IOC orders by
Market Makers into its quote protocol, SQF. The Exchange has elected
not to apply the specified risk protections on IOC orders entered
through SQF as it does for IOC orders entered through FIX and OTTO
because only Market Makers
[[Page 61399]]
utilize SQF to enter IOC orders. Market Makers are professional traders
with their own risk settings. FIX and OTTO, on the other hand, are
utilized by all market participants who may not have their own risk
settings, unlike Market Makers. Market Makers utilize IOC orders to
trade out of accumulated positions and manage their risk when providing
liquidity on the Exchange. The Exchange understands that proper risk
management, including using these IOC orders to offload risk, is vital
for Market Makers, and allows them to maintain tight markets and meet
their quoting and other obligations to the market. Market Makers handle
a large amount of risk when quoting and in addition to the risk
protections required by the Exchange, Market Makers utilize their own
risk management parameters when entering orders, minimizing the
likelihood of a Market Maker's erroneous order from being entered. The
Exchange believes that Market Makers, unlike other market participants,
have the ability to manage their risk when submitting IOC orders
through SQF and should be permitted to elect this method of order entry
to obtain efficiency and speed of order entry, particularly in light of
the quoting obligations that the Exchange imposes on these
participants, unlike other market participants.\61\ The Exchange
believes that allowing Market Makers to submit IOC orders through their
preferred protocol increases their efficiency in submitting such orders
and thereby allows them to maintain quality markets to the benefit of
all market participants that trade on the Exchange. For the foregoing
reasons, the Exchange has opted to not offer the Order Price
Protection, Market Order Spread Protection, and Size Limitation (for
single leg orders), or the Complex Order Price Protection (for Complex
Orders), for IOC orders entered through SQF because Market Makers have
more sophisticated infrastructures than other market participants and
are able to manage their risk.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\61\ See Options 2, Section 5(e).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes to add substantially similar language in
Supplementary Material .03(c), which governs the SQF protocol.
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to add: ``Immediate-or-Cancel
Orders entered into SQF are not subject to the (i) Order Price
Protection, Market Order Spread Protection, and Size Limitation
Protection in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A), (1)(B), and (2)(B)
respectively, for single leg orders, or (ii) Complex Order Price
Protection as defined in Options 3, Section 16(c)(1) for Complex
Orders.'' Adding these exceptions to the SQF rule as well as the IOC
rule will make clear that these order protections will not apply to IOC
orders entered through SQF.
The Exchange further proposes to specify in Supplementary Material
.02(d)(3) that Block Orders, Facilitation Orders, Complex Facilitation
Orders, SOM Orders, Complex SOM Orders, PIM Orders, Complex PIM Orders,
QCC Orders, QCC Complex Orders, Customer Cross Orders, and Customer
Cross Complex Orders are considered to have a TIF of IOC. By their
terms, these orders will be: (1) executed either on entry or after an
exposure period, or (2) cancelled.\62\ The proposed changes in
Supplementary Material .02(d)(3) memorialize current System behavior
and are intended to bring greater transparency in how these order types
operate today.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\62\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2)(C) for substantially
similar language for PRISM orders.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange is relocating rule text governing OPG orders from
Options 3, Section 7(o) into Supplementary Material .02(e) to specify
that orders may be entered with a TIF of OPG. The Exchange also
proposes a number of changes to conform the Exchange's OPG rule with
that of BX. Other than as specified below, the proposed changes do not
modify current Exchange OPG functionality. The Exchange proposes to
remove the word ``limit'' from the relocated OPG rule text in
Supplementary Material .02(e) in order to reflect that the Exchange
will now allow both Market and Limit OPG Orders. As noted above, this
is a proposed functionality change to align with current BX OPG
functionality.\63\ The Exchange also proposes non-substantive changes
to replace the current references to the opening rotation with the term
``Opening Process'' as defined in Options 3, Section 8. The Exchange
further proposes to codify current OPG behavior by stating that OPG
orders may not route.\64\ Lastly, the Exchange proposes to memorialize
current OPG behavior by indicating that OPG orders are not subject to
any protections listed in Options 3, Section 15, except Size
Limitation.\65\ Today, the Exchange does not apply any of the risk
protections in Options 3, Section 15 (except Size Limitation) because
the Opening Process itself has boundaries within which orders will be
executed.\66\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\63\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(1).
\64\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(1) for identical language.
\65\ Id.
\66\ See Options 3, Section 8.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Opening Process
In connection with the technology migration, the Exchange proposes
several enhancements to its Opening Process in Options 3, Section 8.
The Exchange first proposes to remove the current limitation that only
allows routable Public Customer \67\ interest to route during the
Opening Process. Instead, all routable market participant interest will
be allowed to route to align the Exchange's opening functionality with
BX.\68\ Like BX, the Exchange believes that it will be beneficial to
provide all market participants with the opportunity to have their
interest executed on away markets during the Opening Process. To
effectuate the foregoing, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3,
Section 8(b) to remove the sentence providing that only Public Customer
interest is routable during the Opening Process. The Exchange will also
make a corrective change within this rule to ``non-displayed
portions.'' The Exchange further proposes to make a related change in
Options 3, Section 8(i)(7), which currently provides that the System
will route routable Public Customer interest pursuant to Options 3,
Section 10(c)(1)(A). Specifically, the Exchange proposes to remove the
reference to Public Customer to indicate all routable interest will
route in accordance with the Exchange's priority rule. The Exchange
will also update the cross-cite to Options 3, Section 10(c)(1)(A),
currently pointing to the Priority Customer priority overlay, to the
more general priority rule in Options 3, Section 10(c). The Exchange
further proposes to amend Options 3, Section 8(j)(6) to remove the
references to ``Public Customer.'' As amended,
[[Page 61400]]
Section 8(j)(6) will provide: ``The System will execute orders at the
Opening Price that have contingencies (such as, without limitation,
Reserve Orders) and non-routable orders, such as ``Do-Not-Route'' or
``DNR'' Orders, to the extent possible. The System will only route non-
contingency orders, except that Reserve Orders may route up to their
full volume.''
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\67\ The term ``Public Customer'' means a person or entity that
is not a broker or dealer in securities. See Option 1, Section
1(a)(41).
\68\ See BX Options 3, Section 8. See also Securities Exchange
Act Release No. 89731 (September 1, 2020), 85 FR 55524 (September 8,
2020) (SR-BX-2020-016) (noting throughout that BX permits all market
participants to route during its Opening Process). At the end of the
Opening Process, pursuant to MRX Options 3, Section 8(j)(6) and
subsection (i), the System will execute orders at the Opening Price
that have contingencies (such as, without limitation, Reserve
Orders) and non-routable orders, such as a `Do-Not-Route' or `DNR'
Orders, to the extent possible. The System will only route non-
contingency Public Customer orders, except that Public Customer
Reserve Orders may route up to their full volume. For contracts that
are not routable, pursuant to MRX Options 3, Section 8(j)(6), such
as DNR Orders and orders priced through the Opening Price, the
System will cancel (1) any portion of a Do-Not-Route order that
would otherwise have to be routed to the exchange(s) disseminating
the ABBO for an opening to occur, or (2) any order or quote that is
priced through the Opening Price. All other interest will be
eligible for trading after opening.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
In addition, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section
8(g)(1), which currently describes how the Potential Opening Price
would be calculated when there is more than one Potential Opening
Price.\69\ Today, Section 8(g)(1) provides that when two or more
Potential Opening Prices would satisfy the maximum quantity criterion
and leave no contracts unexecuted, the System takes the highest and
lowest of those prices and takes the mid-point; if such mid-point is
not expressed as a permitted minimum price variation, it will be
rounded to the minimum price variation that is closest to the closing
price for the affected series from the immediately prior trading
session. If there is no closing price from the immediately prior
trading session, the System will round up to the minimum price
variation to determine the Opening Price. The Exchange now proposes to
no longer round in the direction of the previous trading day's closing
price and simply round up to the minimum price variation if the mid-
point of the high/low is not expressed as a permitted minimum price
variation. The proposed changes are intended to simplify and bring
greater transparency to the Opening Process, as market participants can
now have a better sense of how the Potential Opening Price will be
calculated without having to account for the closing price of each
options series.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\69\ The Potential Opening Price indicates a price where the
System may open once all other Opening Process criteria is met.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange further proposes to amend Options 3, Section 8(i)(3),
which currently describes the determination of Opening Quote Range
(``OQR'') boundaries in certain scenarios.\70\ Specifically, the
Exchange proposes to replace ``are marketable against the ABBO'' with
``cross the ABBO'' to more precisely describe the specified scenario
within in this rule. The Exchange notes that this is not a System
change, but rather a clarifying change around the applicability of the
rule text.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\70\ OQR is an additional type of boundary used in the Opening
Process, and is intended to limit the opening price to a reasonable,
middle ground price, thus reducing the potential for erroneous
trades during the Opening Process.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Auction Mechanisms
Facilitation and Solicited Order Mechanisms
The Exchange first proposes to make clarifying changes in Options
3, Section 11 (Auction Mechanisms). Today, Supplementary Material .02
to Options 3, Section 11 states that Responses \71\ represent non-firm
interest that can be canceled at any time prior to execution, and that
Responses are not displayed to any market participants. The Exchange
now proposes a non-substantive change to relocate this language into
the introductory paragraph of Options 3, Section 11 after the
definition of ``Response'' for better readability. The Exchange also
proposes to add ``or modified'' after the ``canceled'' to indicate that
auction Responses may be canceled or modified at any time prior to
execution. This is not a change to current System behavior, but rather
a clarification that better aligns the rule text to existing
functionality. The Exchange also notes that the rules for the complex
Facilitation and Solicited Order Mechanisms in Options 3, Sections
11(c)(7) and (e)(4), respectively, already provide for this
concept.\72\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\71\ For purposes of Options 3, Section 11, a ``Response'' means
an electronic message that is sent by Members in response to a
broadcast message. A ``broadcast message'' is an electronic message
sent by the Exchange to all Members upon entry of an order into one
of the auction mechanisms listed within Options 3, Section 11 (i.e.,
Block, Facilitation, or Solicited Order Mechanisms).
\72\ Specifically, these provisions state that Responses
submitted by Members shall not be visible to other auction
participants during the exposure period and can be modified or
deleted before the exposure period has ended.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Price Improvement Mechanism
The Exchange proposes a number of changes to Options 3, Section 13
(Price Improvement Mechanism for Crossing Transactions), some of which
are System changes to align with existing BX Price Improvement
Mechanism (``BX PRISM'') functionality and others that are non-System
changes that add greater clarity to current PIM behavior. The Exchange
proposes to amend Options 3, Section 13(b)(4) to add clarifying rule
text to the current sentence, which states, ``The Crossing Transaction
\73\ may not be canceled, but the price of the Counter-Side Order may
be improved during the exposure period.'' The Exchange proposes to add
``or modified'' after the word ``canceled'' to make clear that the
Crossing Transaction may not be canceled or modified, but the Counter-
Side Order may be improved during the exposure period. This proposed
change would not amend the current System, rather it would bring
greater clarity to the rule text that modifications are not permitted
unless the Counter-Side Order is being improved during the exposure
period.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\73\ A ``Crossing Transaction'' is comprised of the order the
Electronic Access Member represents as agent (the ``Agency Order'')
and a counter-side order for the full size of the Agency Order (the
``Counter-Side Order''). See Options 3, Section 13(b).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange proposes to add rule text within Options 3, Section
13(b)(5) which states, ``Crossing Transactions submitted at or before
the opening of trading are not eligible to initiate an auction and will
be rejected.'' The Exchange notes that this rule text represents
current System behavior. BX has a similar provision within BX Options
3, Section 13(i)(E). The Exchange notes that this rule text will bring
greater clarity to when a Crossing Transaction would be eligible to
initiate a PIM.
The Exchange proposes to amend the current PIM functionality within
Options 3, Section 13(c)(3). Today, during the exposure period,
Improvement Orders \74\ may not be canceled, however, Improvement
Orders may be modified to (i) increase the size at the same price, or
(ii) improve the price of the Improvement Order for any size up to the
size of the Agency Order. The Exchange proposes to amend this
functionality so that Improvement Orders may be canceled or modified
similar to functionality on BX PRISM today within BX Options 3, Section
13(ii)(A)(8). The modification and cancellation of an Improvement Order
through OTTO will be similar to the manner in which a Cancel and
Replace Order \75\ would be handled outside of the auction process. For
Improvement Orders through SQF, the modification and cancellation of
such orders will be handled by sending new Improvement Orders that
overwrite the existing
[[Page 61401]]
Improvement Order with updated price/quantity instructions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\74\ Improvement Orders are responses entered by Members to
indicate the size and price at which they want to participate in the
execution of the Agency Order. See Options 3, Section 13(c)(1).
\75\ Cancel and Replace Orders shall mean a single message for
the immediate cancellation of a previously received order and the
replacement of that order with a new order. If the previously placed
order is already filled partially or in its entirety, the
replacement order is automatically canceled or reduced by the number
of contracts that were executed. The replacement order will retain
the priority of the cancelled order, if the order posts to the Order
Book, provided the price is not amended, size is not increased, or
in the case of Reserve Orders, size is not changed. If the
replacement portion of a Cancel and Replace Order does not satisfy
the System's price or other reasonability checks (e.g., Options 3,
Section 15(b)(1)(A) and Options 3, Section 15(b)(1)(B)) the existing
order shall be cancelled and not replaced. See Supplementary
Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Next, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section 13(d)(5),
which currently states, ``If a trading halt is initiated after an order
is entered into the Price Improvement Mechanism, such auction will be
automatically terminated without execution.'' The Exchange proposes to
instead provide, ``If a trading halt is initiated after an order is
entered into the Price Improvement Mechanism, such auction will be
automatically terminated with execution solely with the Counter-Side
Order.'' In the event of a trading halt, since the Counter-Side Order
has guaranteed that an execution will occur at the same price as the
Crossing Transaction or better, and Improvement Orders offer no such
guarantee, the Counter-Side Order is the only valid price at which to
execute the Crossing Transaction. This is similar to functionality on
BX PRISM at BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C).\76\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\76\ BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C) provides that if the
situations described in sub-paragraphs (B)(2) or (3) above occur,
the entire PRISM Order will be executed at: (1) in the case of the
BX BBO crossing the PRISM Order stop price, the best response
price(s) or, if the stop price is the best price in the Auction, at
the stop price, unless the best response price is equal to or better
than the price of a limit order resting on the Order Book on the
same side of the market as the PRISM Order, in which case the PRISM
Order will be executed against that response, but at a price that is
at least $0.01 better than the price of such limit order at the time
of the conclusion of the Auction; or (2) in the case of a trading
halt on the Exchange in the affected series, the stop price, in
which case the PRISM Order will be executed solely against the
Initiating Order. Any unexecuted PAN responses will be cancelled.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes a System change to adopt a new same side
execution price check for PIM, which will be described in new
subsection (d)(6) of Options 3, Section 13 and will be functionally
identical to BX PRISM. As proposed, Options 3, Section 13(d)(6) will
provide that if the PIM execution price would be the same or better
than an order on the limit order book on the same side of the market as
the Agency Order, the Agency Order may only be executed at a price that
is at least $0.01 better than the resting order's limit price. If such
resting order's limit price is equal to or crosses the initiating
Crossing Transaction price, then the entire Agency Order will trade at
the initiating Crossing Transaction price with all better priced
counter-side interest being considered for execution at the initiating
Crossing Transaction price. As noted above, this price check will be
functionally identical to the same side execution price check on BX
PRISM today.\77\ Like BX, the proposed price check is designed to
ensure that the Exchange would not trade at prices that would lock or
cross interest on the same side of the market as the Agency Order where
limit orders have rested and obtained priority to execute at that
price. In the event where a limit order arrives on the same side of the
market as the Agency Order and is at the same or better price than the
initiating Crossing Transaction price, the Exchange would execute the
entire PIM order at the initiating Crossing Transaction price. The
execution takes place at this price because the PIM is guaranteed an
execution and the PIM agency side instructions would not allow an
execution to take place at a higher (lower) price than submitted for a
buying (selling) agency side PIM order. Considering that the limit
order has arrived either at or better on the same side as the Agency
Order than the agency side price, the initiating Crossing Transaction
price is the only price at which the guaranteed execution can take
place.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\77\ BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(I) provides that if the
execution price of the PRISM Auction would be the same or better
than an order on the limit order book on the same side of the market
as the PRISM Order, the PRISM Order may only be executed at a price
that is at least $0.01 better than the resting order's limit price.
If such resting order's limit price is equal to or crosses the stop
price, then the entire PRISM Order will trade at the stop price with
all better priced interest being considered for execution at the
stop price.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following examples illustrate how the proposed PIM execution
price check would work:
Example: PIM Executes With Improvement Order at $0.01 Better Than a
Limit Order on the Same Side of the Market as the Agency Order
Firm Limit order to buy @1.40 arrives prior to the PIM auction
beginning
MRX BBO: 1.40 x 2.00
PIM Agency Order to buy 20 @1.50 arrives with an auto-match price of
1.50 indicated
PIM Improvement Order \78\ to sell 20 @1.40 arrives
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\78\ ``Improvement Orders'' are responses sent by Members during
the PIM's exposure period in response to the PIM that indicate the
size and price at which they want to participate in the execution of
the Agency Order. See Options 3, Section 13(c)(1).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Auction concludes after timer and PIM Agency Order trades 20 with PIM
Improvement Order @1.41; the Counter-Side Order \79\ cancels
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\79\ The ``Counter-Side Order'' is the counter-side order for
the full size of the Agency Order that is entered into the PIM by
the initiating Electronic Access Member. See Options 3, Section
13(b).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Example: PIM Executes at Agency Price With All Better Priced Interest
When Limit Order on Same Side Equals or Crosses the Initiating Crossing
Transaction Price
Assume MRX BBO: 1.00 x 2.00
PIM Agency Order to buy 20 @1.50 arrives with an auto-match price of
1.50 indicated
PIM Improvement Order to sell 20 @1.40 arrives
During the exposure period, Firm Limit order to buy @1.50 arrives
Auction concludes after timer and PIM Agency Order trades 12 with PIM
Improvement Order @1.50 and 8 with the Counter-Side Order @1.50 (i.e.,
the guaranteed execution price) because all better priced interest must
trade at the initiating Crossing Transaction price when the limit order
on the same side equals or crosses the initiating Crossing Transaction
price.\80\ The remainder of the Counter-Side Order and the remainder of
the PIM Improvement Order cancel. The execution takes place at 1.50
because the PIM is guaranteed an execution, and the PIM agency side
instructions would not allow an execution to take place at a higher
price than the submitted 1.50 buying price for the agency side PIM
order.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\80\ The order is allocated pursuant to Options 3, Section
13(d)(3) where the Counter-Side Order will be allocated the greater
of 1 contract or 40%, which, in this case, equates to 8 contracts
out of the 20 contracts. Thus, in this case, the Improvement Order
is allocated 12 contracts to fully execute the 20 contracts of the
original PIM Agency Order.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Further, the Exchange proposes amendments to Complex PIM, some of
which are similar to the amendments proposed for simple PIM. Similar to
simple PIM, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section
13(e)(4)(ii) to state, ``During the exposure period, Improvement
Complex Orders may be canceled or modified.'' \81\ The Exchange
proposes to amend this functionality so that Improvement Orders may be
canceled or modified similar to functionality on BX today within BX
Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8).\82\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\81\ Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) currently states, ``During
the exposure period, Improvement Complex Orders may not be canceled,
but may be modified to (1) increase the size at the same price, or
(2) improve the price of the Improvement Complex Order for any
size.''
\82\ BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8) provides that a PAN
response must be equal to or better than the displayed NBBO at the
time of receipt of the PAN response. PAN responses may be modified
or cancelled during the Auction. A PAN response submitted with a
price that is outside the NBBO will be rejected.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes to relocate the last sentence of Options
3, Section 13(e)(3) into Options 3, Section
[[Page 61402]]
13(e)(4)(iv) at new ``(E)''. The Exchange proposes similar rule text
within simple PIM to indicate that an exposure period would
automatically terminate if a trading halt is initiated after the order
is entered into a Complex PIM. The relocation would add the rule text
to a more logical place within the Complex PIM rule.
The Exchange further proposes in the same rule to memorialize
another scenario in which the exposure period for a Complex PIM would
early terminate today. Specifically, the Exchange proposes to amend
Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(iv) at new ``(D)'' to provide that the
exposure period will automatically terminate when a resting Complex
Order in the same complex strategy on either side of the market becomes
marketable against the Complex Order Book or bids and offers for the
individual legs. The Exchange believes that the proposed codification
will detail for market participants the situations in which early
termination would occur for Complex PIMs today, and align the
Exchange's rules with current System behavior. The Exchange notes that
the exposure period for a Complex Order Exposure likewise early
terminates today when a resting Complex Order becomes marketable
against the Complex Order Book or bids and offers for the individual
legs.\83\ Accordingly, the proposed language closely tracks existing
Complex Order Exposure language. The Exchange believes that it is
appropriate to early terminate Complex PIM under these circumstances
for the following reasons. When the resting Complex Order is on the
same side as the Agency Complex Order, interest that becomes marketable
against the resting Complex Order would also be marketable against the
Complex PIM order. Therefore, early terminating the Complex PIM would
allow the Complex PIM order to interact with this interest given that
the Complex PIM order is at a superior price compared to the resting
Complex Order, thus providing an opportunity for price improvement for
the Agency Complex Order. Additionally, when the resting Complex Order
is on the opposite side of the Agency Complex Order, interest that
arrives marketable against the resting Complex Order is now at a
superior price to the Agency Complex Order. The Exchange would
therefore early terminate in this scenario and execute the Complex PIM
order with its contra side order because it is no longer at top of
book.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\83\ Supplementary Material .01(b)(ii) of MRX Options 3, Section
14 provides that the exposure period for a Complex Order will end
immediately: (A) upon the receipt of a Complex Order for the same
complex strategy on either side of the market that is marketable
against the Complex Order Book or bids and offers for the individual
legs; (B) upon the receipt of a non-marketable Complex Order for the
same complex strategy on the same side of the market that would
cause the price of the exposed Complex Order to be outside of the
best bid or offer for the same complex strategy on the Complex Order
Book; or (C) when a resting Complex Order for the same complex
strategy on either side of the market becomes marketable against
interest on the Complex Order book or bids and offers for same
individual legs of the complex strategy.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also proposes to codify existing System behavior in
the Complex PIM rule at Options 3, Section 13(e)(5), which currently
provides that when a marketable Complex Order on the opposite side of
the Agency Complex Order ends the exposure period, it will participate
in the execution of the Agency Complex Order at the price that is mid-
way between the best counter-side interest and the same side best bid
or offer on the Complex Order Book or net price from MRX best bid or
offer on individual legs, whichever is better, so that both the
marketable Complex Order and the Agency Complex Order receive price
improvement. Specifically, the Exchange proposes to add that
transactions will be rounded, when necessary, to the $0.01 increment
that favors the Agency Complex Order. As noted above, this is not a
functionality change, but rather is intended to better articulate
current System behavior. The Exchange also notes that the simple PIM
rule already articulates that the mid-way price will be rounded to the
$0.01 increment that favors the Agency Order in Options 3, Section
13(d)(4). The rounding for Complex PIM currently operates the same way
as simple PIM in this respect, so the proposed Complex PIM language
closely tracks the simple PIM language.
Finally, the Exchange proposes to amend Supplementary Material .02
to Options 3, Section 13 to add the following sentence: ``It will be
considered a violation of this Rule and will be deemed conduct
inconsistent with just and equitable principles of trade and a
violation of Options 9, Section 1 if an Electronic Access Member
submits a PIM Order (initiating an auction) and also submits its own
Improvement Order in the same auction.'' BX has a similar prohibition
within BX Options 3, Section 13(iii). The proposed new rule is intended
to provide guidance to Members where certain behavior within a PIM will
not be considered a bona fide transaction.
Order Price Protection
The Exchange currently has a Limit Order Price Protection in
Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A), which is a ``fat finger'' check
designed to address risks to market participants of human error in
entering certain orders at unintended prices. Specifically, there is a
limit on the amount by which incoming limit orders to buy may be priced
above the Exchange's best offer and by which incoming limit orders to
sell may be priced below the Exchange's best bid. Limit orders that
exceed the pricing limit are rejected. The limit is established by the
Exchange from time-to-time for orders to buy (sell) as the greater of
the Exchange's best offer (bid) plus (minus): (i) an absolute amount
not to exceed $2.00, or (ii) a percentage of the Exchange's best bid/
offer not to exceed 10%.
The Exchange proposes to replace the existing risk protection with
an Order Price Protection (``OPP'') that would similarly prevent the
execution of limit orders at prices outside pre-set parameters. The
proposed OPP will be functionally similar to the OPP functionality
currently offered by BX.\84\ In particular, proposed Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A) will provide that OPP is a feature of the System that
prevents limit orders at prices outside of pre-set standard limits from
being accepted by the System. Further, OPP will reject incoming orders
that exceed certain parameters according to the following algorithm set
forth in proposed Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A)(ii):
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\84\ BX's OPP is currently memorialized in BX Options 3, Section
15(a)(1), which provides that OPP is a feature of the System that
prevents certain day limit, good til cancelled, and immediate or
cancel orders at prices outside of pre-set standard limits from
being accepted by the System. BX's rule also provides that OPP
applies to all options but does not apply to market orders. As
described above, the Exchange is proposing to adopt an OPP rule that
more accurately describes this functionality than BX's current OPP
rule. BX will file a separate rule change to conform its OPP rule
with the Exchange's proposed rule text.
(a) If the better of the NBBO or the internal market BBO (the
``Reference BBO'') on the contra-side of an incoming order is
greater than $1.00, orders with a limit more than the greater of the
below will cause the order to be rejected by the System upon
receipt.
(1) 50% less (greater) than such contra-side Reference Best Bid
(Offer); or
(2) a configurable dollar amount not to exceed $1.00 less
(greater) than such contra-side Reference Best Bid (Offer) as
specified by the Exchange announced via an Options Trader Alert.
(b) If the Reference BBO on the contra-side of an incoming order
is less than or equal to $1.00, orders with a limit more than the
greater of the below will cause the order to be rejected by the
System upon receipt.
(1) 100% less (greater) than such contra-side Reference Best Bid
(Offer); or
(2) a configurable dollar amount not to exceed $1.00 less
(greater) than such contra-
[[Page 61403]]
side Reference Best Bid (Offer) as specified by the Exchange
announced via an Options Trader Alert.
The proposed OPP will be calculated using the better of the NBBO or
the internal market BBO (i.e., the Reference BBO) instead of the
Exchange BBO as currently used today, which will align to current BX
functionality.\85\ Like BX, the Exchange believes that calculating OPP
on the basis of the better of the NBBO or the internal market BBO
protects investors and the public interest where the internal market
BBO is better than the NBBO. In addition, the proposed OPP parameters
will be the greater of a percentage threshold or fixed dollar amount,
similar to today's limit order price protection that uses the greater
of a percentage or fixed dollar threshold. The proposed parameters are
identical to BX's OPP.\86\ The Exchange believes that the proposed
algorithm for OPP would continue to provide a reasonable limit to the
range where orders will be accepted.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\85\ See BX Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(B).
\86\ Id. The Exchange will initially set the fixed dollar
configuration at $0.05, identical to BX.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As set forth in proposed Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i), OPP
will be operational each trading day after the opening until the close
of trading, except during trading halts, which will be identical to
current functionality.\87\ The Exchange also proposes in this paragraph
to add identical language as BX, which will provide the Exchange with
discretion to temporarily deactivate OPP from time to time on an intra-
day basis if it is determined that unusual market conditions warranted
deactivation in the interest of a fair and orderly market. Like BX, the
Exchange believes that it will be useful to have the flexibility to
temporarily disable OPP intra-day in response to an unusual market
event (for example, if dissemination of data was delayed and resulted
in unreliable underlying values needed for the Reference BBO). Members
would be notified of intra-day OPP deactivation and any subsequent
reactivation by the Exchange through the issuance of System status
messages. Specifically, the Exchange proposes to add in Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i) that OPP may be temporarily deactivated on an
intra-day basis at the Exchange's discretion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\87\ See Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A) (currently providing
that the limit order price protection does not apply to the opening
process or during a trading halt).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following examples illustrate the application of the proposed
OPP thresholds:
Example: An Option Priced Less Than or Equal to $1.00
For a penny MPV option with a BBO on MRX of $0.01 x $0.02, consider
that the configurable dollar amount is set to $0.05
If the incoming order was less than $1.00, and the Reference BBO is the
internal market BBO, the System will reject buy orders priced higher
than the greater of (i) $0.04 (100% greater than the contra-side
Reference Best Offer of $0.02) or (ii) $0.07 ($0.02 offer + $0.05
configuration)
Example: An Option Priced Greater Than $1.00
For a penny MPV option with a BBO on MRX of $1.01 x $1.02, consider
that the configurable dollar amount is set to $0.05
If the incoming order was more than $1.00, and the Reference BBO is the
internal market BBO, the System will reject buy orders priced higher
than the greater of (i) $1.53 (50% greater than the contra-side
Reference Best Offer of $1.02) or (ii) $1.07 ($1.02 offer + $0.05
configuration)
Post-Only Quoting Protection
The Exchange proposes to adopt an optional quoting protection for
Market Makers that will be identical to current BX functionality.\88\
This optional risk protection would allow Market Makers to prevent
their quotes from removing liquidity from the Exchange's order book
upon entry.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\88\ See BX Options 3, Section 15(c)(3).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specifically, the Exchange proposes to adopt the new risk
protection in Options 3, Section 15(a)(3)(C). As proposed, Market
Makers may elect to configure their SQF protocols to prevent their
quotes from removing liquidity (``Post-Only Quote Configuration''). A
Post-Only Quote Configuration would re-price or cancel a Market Maker's
quote that would otherwise lock or cross any resting order or quote
\89\ on the order book upon entry. Market Makers may elect whether to
re-price or cancel their quotes with this functionality. When
configured for re-price, quotes would be re-priced and displayed by the
System to one MPV below the current best offer (for bids) or above the
current best bid (for offers). Notwithstanding the aforementioned, if a
quote with a Post-Only Quote Configuration would not lock or cross an
order or quote on the System but would lock or cross the NBBO, the
quote will be handled pursuant to Options 3, Section 4(b)(6).\90\ When
configured for cancel, Market Makers will have their quotes cancelled
whenever the quote would lock or cross the NBBO or be placed on the
book at a price other than its limit price. Finally, the Exchange notes
that similar to BX, this risk protection will not apply during an
Opening Process because the order book is established once options
series are open for trading.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\89\ This would include any re-priced orders as described in the
Re-Pricing Filing as proposed Options 3, Section 5(d), ALOs as
described in proposed Options 3, Section 7(n), and any re-priced
quotes as described in Options 3, Section 4(b)(6). As described
above, ALOs may re-price.
\90\ Options 3, Section 4(b)(6) provides that a quote will not
be executed at a price that trades through another market or
displayed at a price that would lock or cross another market. If, at
the time of entry, a quote would cause a locked or crossed market
violation or would cause a trade-through violation, it will either
be re-priced and displayed at one minimum price variance above (for
offers) or below (for bids) the national best price, or immediately
cancelled, as configured by the Member.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Below are some examples of the Post-Only Quote Configuration
functionality:
Re-Priced Post-Only Quote Configuration--Penny Interval Program Display
and Execution Example
Penny Interval Program MPV in open trading state
Market Makers A and C do not have Post-Only Quote
Configuration risk protection configured
Market Maker B is configured for Post-Only Quote Configuration
re-price
Market Maker A quote $0.98 (10) x $1.00 (10)
ABBO $0.96 x $1.03
Market Maker B quote $1.00 (10) x $1.01 (10) arrives
[cir] Bid side of quote re-prices onto order book @0.99 and sets
displayed NBBO to 10 quantity
[cir] Offer side rests at 1.01 without issue
Market Maker C quote $0.97 (20) x $0.98 (20) arrives
Trades 10 with Market Maker B @$0.99 and 10 with Market Maker A @$0.98
Market Maker B avoids taking liquidity while Market Maker C, who
chose not to be configured for such, removes liquidity by interacting
with re-priced interest on MRX's order book.
Re-Priced Post-Only Quote Configuration--Non-Penny Interval Program
Display and Execution Example
Non-Penny Interval Program MPV in open trading state
Market Maker A quote $0.95 (10) x $1.00 (10)
ABBO $0.85 x $1.05
Market Maker B (configured for Post-Only Quote Configuration
and selection of re-price upon quote) quote arrives $1.00 (5) x $1.05
(5)
[cir] Bid side quote re-prices on order
[[Page 61404]]
book to $0.95
[cir] Displays on order book @$0.95 (bid), which now shows (15
quantity)
[cir] Offer side quote books and displays in Depth of Market Feed
at $1.05
Order to sell 10 contracts arrives @$0.95
[cir] 7 contracts execute with Market Maker A @$0.95
[cir] 3 contracts execute with Market Maker B @$0.95
In this example, the Market Maker avoided taking liquidity by
deploying the Post-Only Quote Configuration with re-price.
Kill Switch
As set forth in Options 3, Section 17, the Exchange offers an order
cancellation Kill Switch, which is an optional tool that allows Members
to initiate a message to the System to promptly cancel and restrict
their order activity on the Exchange. Members may submit a Kill Switch
request to the System for certain identifier(s) (``Identifier'') on
either a user or group level.\91\ Today, Members can log in through a
graphical user interface (``GUI'') to send a message to the Exchange to
initiate the order cancellation Kill Switch.\92\ As an alternative to
the GUI Kill Switch, Members may also send a message through one of the
Exchange's order entry ports (i.e., FIX and OTTO) to initiate the order
cancellation Kill Switch.\93\ Once a Member initiates the Kill Switch
(either through the GUI or an order entry port), it will result in the
cancellation of all existing orders for the requested Identifier(s).
The Member will be unable to enter any additional orders for the
affected Identifier(s) until the Member sends a re-entry request to the
Exchange.\94\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\91\ Identifiers include Exchange accounts, ports, and/or
mnemonics. Thus, a Member using Kill Switch may elect to cancel
orders for an individual Identifier (e.g., mnemonic) or any group of
Identifiers (e.g., all mnemonics within one Member firm).
Permissible groups must reside within a single Member firm. See
Options 3, Section 17(a).
\92\ See Options 3, Section 17(a)(2)
\93\ See Options 3, Section 17(a)(1).
\94\ See Options 3, Section 17(a)(3).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Due to the lack of demand for the GUI Kill Switch by Members, the
Exchange proposes to decommission this optional tool with the planned
technology migration.\95\ With the proposed changes, the Exchange seeks
to streamline its product offerings and to reallocate Exchange
resources to other business and risk management initiatives. While the
Exchange will no longer offer this optional risk protection to Members
through the GUI, it will continue to offer this functionality through
FIX and OTTO.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\95\ No Members have used the GUI Kill Switch for order
cancellation in 2022. The Exchange has provided notice to Members
via Options Trader Alert. See Options Trader Alert #2022-30.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
In addition, all Members may contact the Exchange's market
operations staff to request that the Exchange cancel any of their
existing bids, offers, or orders in any series of options.\96\
Furthermore, the Exchange will continue to have System-enforced risk
mechanisms that automatically remove orders for the Member once certain
pre-set thresholds or conditions are met. This includes risk
protections such as the market wide risk protection \97\ and cancel on
disconnect.\98\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\96\ The market wide risk protection automatically removes
Member orders when certain firm-set thresholds are met. Once the
thresholds are triggered, the Member must send a re-entry indicator
to re-enter the System. See Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(C).
\97\ See Options 3, Section 19.
\98\ When the OTTO or FIX Port detects the loss of communication
with a Member's Client Application because the Exchange's server
does not receive a Heartbeat message for a certain time period
(``nn'' seconds), the Exchange will automatically logoff the
Member's affected Client Application and if the Member has elected
to have its orders cancelled pursuant to Section 18(f) (for OTTO) or
Section 18(g) (for FIX) automatically cancel all orders. See Options
3, Section 18(c) and (d).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
To effect the proposed decommission of the GUI Kill Switch for
order cancellation, the Exchange proposes to amend Options 3, Section
17 by eliminating paragraph (a)(2) and related cross-cites within this
rule. The Exchange will also renumber the paragraphs in this rule
accordingly.
The Exchange notes that it previously amended its rules to
decommission the quote removal Kill Switch that was available to Market
Makers through the GUI.\99\ The Exchange noted in SR-MRX-2021-10 that
Market Makers did not use the GUI Kill Switch to remove their quotes,
but rather, utilized other means such as the mass purge request through
SQF. In this case, the Exchange similarly notes that no Members use the
GUI Kill Switch to cancel their orders but rather, utilize other means
like the port Kill Switch through FIX and OTTO to purge their existing
orders from the System. As such, the Exchange believes that eliminating
the GUI Kill Switch all together (including for orders as proposed
herein) will streamline the Exchange's risk protection offerings in a
manner that reflects Member use.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\99\ See Securities Exchange Act Release No. 93004 (September
15, 2021), 86 FR 52516 (September 21, 2021) (SR-MRX-2021-10).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data Feeds and TradeInfo
In connection with the technology migration, the Exchange proposes
a number of enhancements to its current data feed offerings in Options
3, Section 23(a), many of which are intended to conform with current BX
functionality, as specified below.
As set forth in Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), the Exchange offers
the Nasdaq MRX Depth of Market Data Feed (``Depth of Market Feed''),
which currently provides aggregate quotes and orders at the top five
price levels on MRX, and provides subscribers with a consolidated view
of tradable prices beyond the BBO, showing additional liquidity and
enhancing transparency for MRX traded options. The data provided for
each option series includes the symbols (series and underlying
security), put or call indicator, expiration date, the strike price of
the series, and whether the option series is available for trading on
the Exchange and identifies if the series is available for closing
transactions only. In addition, subscribers are provided with total
aggregate quantity, Public Customer aggregate quantity, Priority
Customer aggregate quantity, price, and side (i.e., bid/ask). This
information is provided for each of the top five price levels on the
Depth Feed. The feed also provides order imbalances on opening/
reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to no longer provide book information for
the top five price levels, and instead provide full depth-of-book
information. As such, the Exchange will delete language that relates to
top five price level information in the rule text. The Exchange also
proposes to add more specificity around what would be provided in the
opening/reopening order imbalance information (namely, the size of
matched contracts and size of the imbalance). The Exchange further
proposes a technical change to correct an erroneous reference to
``ISE'' within the rule text. The proposed changes will closely align
the information provided on the Exchange's Depth of Market Feed with
that of BX's Depth of Market Feed, except the Exchange will not offer
auction and exposure notifications on its Depth of Market Feed like BX
does today.\100\ The Exchange already offers auction and exposure
notifications on the Nasdaq MRX Order Feed as described below.\101\ As
amended,
[[Page 61405]]
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1) would provide:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\100\ See BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1). As discussed below,
the Exchange is instead proposing to offer these notifications on
the Nasdaq MRX Order Feed. BX does not have a comparable order feed
today.
\101\ BX does not have a comparable order feed today. However,
the proposed data elements in the MRX Order Feed already exist in
the rules or technical specifications (for the Attributable Order
content) of other options exchanges, as described below.
Nasdaq MRX Depth of Market Data Feed (``Depth of Market Feed'')
is a data feed that provides full order and quote depth information
for individual orders and quotes on the Exchange book and last sale
information for trades executed on the Exchange. The data provided
for each option series includes the symbols (series and underlying
security), put or call indicator, expiration date, the strike price
of the series, and whether the option series is available for
trading on the Exchange and identifies if the series is available
for closing transactions only. The feed also provides order
imbalances on opening/reopening (size of matched contracts and size
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
of the imbalance).
As set forth in Options 3, Section 23(a)(2), the Exchange offers
the Nasdaq MRX Order Feed (``Order Feed''), which currently provides
information on new orders resting on the book (e.g., price, quantity
and market participant capacity). In addition, the feed also announces
all auctions. The data provided for each option series includes the
symbols (series and underlying security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the series, and whether the option
series is available for trading on MRX and identifies if the series is
available for closing transactions only. The feed also provides order
imbalances on opening/reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to update the information that would be
available on the Order Feed. In particular, the Exchange would include
Attributable Order tags \102\ (as provided by the Member) and related
data content around displayed order types and specified order
attributes (e.g., OCC account number, give-up information, CMTA
information).\103\ The Exchange also proposes to add more specificity
around what would be provided in the opening/reopening order imbalance
information (namely, the size of matched contracts and size of the
imbalance). This specifically aligns to the data elements in both BX's
Depth of Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1) and the
Exchange's proposed Depth of Market Feed in proposed Options 3, Section
23(a)(1). The Exchange will continue to provide auction notifications
on the Order Feed, but will relocate the existing language to the end
of the rule and adopt new content by providing that the proposed Order
Feed will provide exposure notifications as well.\104\ As amended,
Options 3, Section 23(a)(2) would provide:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\102\ As discussed above, an Attributable Order is a market or
limit order which displays the user firm ID for purposes of
electronic trading on the Exchange. See Options 3, Section 7(h).
\103\ The Exchange notes that Cboe has similar attributable
order functionality in Cboe Rule 5.6(c) as an order a user
designates for display (price and size) that includes the user's
executing firm ID or other unique identifier. While Cboe does not
have a comparable data feed rule, Cboe's technical specifications
indicate that it currently has Participant ID and Client ID tags
available on its Multicast PITCH data feed. See Section 4.6 in
https://cdn.cboe.com/resources/membership/US_EQUITIES_OPTIONS_MULTICAST_PITCH_SPECIFICATION.pdf (relating to
Participant ID or Client ID as optionally specified values).
\104\ BX's Depth of Market Feed currently has identical content
relating to auction and exposure notifications in BX Options 3,
Section 23(a)(1). Exposure notifications are new with the
introduction of routing and the removal of flash functionality in
the Routing Filing. An exposure notification informs the market of
an order that has arrived marketable against an ABBO and has a
routing timer pursuant to the changes introduced to Options 5,
Section 4 in the Routing Filing, while an auction notification is
the notification of an auction for a Block, simple/complex
Facilitation, simple/complex Solicited Order, simple/complex PIM
auction, or a complex exposure auction pursuant to Supplementary
Material .01 to Options 3, Section 14.
Nasdaq MRX Order Feed (``Order Feed'') provides information on
new orders resting on the book (e.g., price, quantity, market
participant capacity and Attributable Order tags when provided by a
Member). The data provided for each option series includes the
symbols (series and underlying security), displayed order types,
order attributes (e.g., OCC account number, give-up information,
CMTA information), put or call indicator, expiration date, the
strike price of the series, and whether the option series is
available for trading on MRX and identifies if the series is
available for closing transactions only. The feed also provides
order imbalances on opening/reopening (size of matched contracts and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
size of the imbalance), auction and exposure notifications.
As set forth in Options 3, Section 23(a)(3), the Exchange offers
the Nasdaq MRX Top Quote Feed, which currently calculates and
disseminates MRX's best bid and offer position, with aggregated size
(including total size in aggregate, for Professional Order size in the
aggregate and Priority Customer Order size in the aggregate), based on
displayable order and quote interest in the System. The feed also
provides last trade information along with opening price, daily trading
volume, high and low prices for the day. The data provided for each
option series includes the symbols (series and underlying security),
put or call indicator, expiration date, the strike price of the series,
and whether the option series is available for trading on MRX and
identifies if the series is available for closing transactions only.
The feed also provides order imbalances on opening/reopening.
The Exchange now proposes to harmonize certain features of this
feed with BX's Top of Market Feed while retaining certain intended
differences as specified below.\105\ The Exchange first proposes to
rename the Nasdaq MRX Top Quote Feed to the Nasdaq MRX Top of Market
Feed (``Top Feed'') to match the BX feed name. The Exchange further
proposes to no longer provide information for opening price, daily
trading volume, high and low prices for the day. These are conforming
changes that would align the information provided on the Exchange's Top
Feed with information on BX's Top Feed.\106\ The Exchange will continue
to provide aggregated size information as a legacy holdover, which will
be different than current BX functionality. Similarly, the Exchange
will continue to provide opening/reopening order imbalance information
on its Top Feed unlike BX. As amended, Options 3, Section 23(a)(3) will
provide:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\105\ See BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(2).
\106\ Id.
Nasdaq MRX Top of Market Feed (``Top Feed'') calculates and
disseminates MRX's best bid and offer position, with aggregated size
(including total size in aggregate, for Professional Order size in
the aggregate and Priority Customer Order size in the aggregate),
based on displayable order and quote interest in the System. The
feed also provides last trade information and for each option series
includes the symbols (series and underlying security), put or call
indicator, expiration date, the strike price of the series, and
whether the option series is available for trading on MRX and
identifies if the series is available for closing transactions only.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The feed also provides order imbalances on opening/reopening.
As set forth in Options 3, Section 23(a)(4), the Exchange offers
the Nasdaq MRX Trades Feed (``Trades Feed''), which currently displays
last trade information along with opening price, daily trading volume,
high and low prices for the day. The data provided for each option
series includes the symbols (series and underlying security), put or
call indicator, expiration date, the strike price of the series, and
whether the option series is available for trading on MRX and
identifies if the series is available for closing transactions only.
The Exchange proposes to no longer provide information for opening
price, daily trading volume, high and low prices for the day to align
to the changes proposed for the Top Feed described above. As amended,
Options 3, Section 23(a)(4) will provide:
Nasdaq MRX Trades Feed (``Trades Feed'') displays last trade
information. The data provided for each option series includes the
symbols (series and underlying security), put or call indicator,
expiration date, the strike price of the series, and whether the
option series is available for trading on MRX and
[[Page 61406]]
identifies if the series is available for closing transactions only.
As set forth in Options 3, Section 23(a)(5), the Exchange offers
the Nasdaq MRX Spread Feed (``Spread Feed''), which currently is a feed
that consists of: (1) options orders for all Complex Orders (i.e.,
spreads, buy-writes, delta neutral strategies, etc.); (2) data
aggregated at the top five price levels (BBO) on both the bid and offer
side of the market; (3) last trades information. The Spread Feed
provides updates, including prices, side, size, and capacity, for every
Complex Order placed on the MRX Complex Order Book. The Spread Feed
shows: (1) aggregate bid/ask quote size; (2) aggregate bid/ask quote
size for Professional Customer Orders; and (3) aggregate bid/ask quote
size for Priority Customer Orders for MRX traded options. The feed also
provides Complex Order auction notifications.
Similar to the proposed changes to the Depth of Market Feed above,
the Exchange now proposes in the Spread Feed to no longer provide book
information for the top five price levels, and instead provide full
depth-of-book information. As such, the Exchange will delete language
that relates to top five price level information in the rule text, and
replace it with full depth language that is substantively similar to
the language in the current BX Depth of Market Feed in BX Options 3,
Section 23(a)(1) and in the Exchange's proposed Depth of Market Feed in
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), except the proposed language herein will
be tailored to complex functionality. The Exchange also proposes to add
Attributable Complex Order \107\ tags (when provided by the Member)
into the Spread Feed.\108\ The Exchange also proposes to delete the
following sentence: ``The Spread Feed provides updates, including
prices, side, size, and capacity, for every Complex Order placed on the
MRX Complex Order Book. The Spread Feed shows: (1) aggregate bid/ask
quote size; (2) aggregate bid/ask quote size for Professional Customer
Orders; and (3) aggregate bid/ask quote size for Priority Customer
Orders for MRX traded options.'' The Exchange proposes instead to
incorporate these concepts into the amended Spread Feed rule in a
manner that is more consistent with the other amended rules in Options
3, Section 23(a).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\107\ An Attributable Complex Order is a Market or Limit Complex
Order that is designated as an Attributable Order as provided in
Options 3, Section 7(h). See Options 3, Section 14(b)(4).
\108\ Cboe currently allows complex orders to be designated as
Attributable. See Cboe Rule 5.33(b)(3). While Cboe does not have a
comparable data feed rule, Cboe's technical specifications indicate
that it currently has Participant ID and Client ID tags available on
its Complex Multicast PITCH data feed. See Section 3.8 in https://cdn.cboe.com/resources/membership/US_OPTIONS_COMPLEX_MULTICAST_PITCH_SPECIFICATION.pdf (relating to
Participant ID or Client ID as optionally specified values).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As amended, Options 3, Section 23(a)(5) will provide:
Nasdaq MRX Spread Feed (``Spread Feed'') is a feed that consists
of: (1) options orders for all Complex Orders (i.e., spreads, buy-
writes, delta neutral strategies, etc.); (2) full Complex Order
depth information, including prices, side, size, capacity,
Attributable Complex Order tags when provided by a Member, and order
attributes (e.g., OCC account number, give-up information, CMTA
information), for individual Complex Orders on the Exchange book;
(3) last trades information; and (4) calculating and disseminating
MRX's complex best bid and offer position, with aggregated size
(including total size in aggregate, for Professional Order size in
the aggregate and Priority Customer Order size in the aggregate),
based on displayable Complex Order interest in the System. The feed
also provides Complex Order auction notifications.
In addition, the Exchange proposes to no longer offer TradeInfo,
which is a user interface set forth in Options 3, Section 23(b)(2) that
permits Members to: (i) search all orders submitted in a particular
security or all orders of a particular type, regardless of their status
(open, canceled, executed, etc.); (ii) view orders and executions; and
(iii) download orders and executions for recordkeeping purposes.
TradeInfo users may also cancel open orders at the order, port, or firm
mnemonic level through TradeInfo. Due to the lack of demand for this
interface by Members,\109\ the Exchange seeks to decommission the
TradeInfo interface when the Exchange migrates over to the enhanced
Nasdaq platform with the technology migration.\110\ The Exchange notes
that FIX, FIX DROP,\111\ and the Clearing Trade Interface
(``CTI''),\112\ which are available to all Members, can be used today
to obtain order information that is currently available within
TradeInfo, and FIX can be used to cancel orders today.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\109\ No Members logged into TradeInfo in 2022.
\110\ The Exchange provided notice to all Members through an
Options Trader Alert. See Options Trader Alert #2022-29.
\111\ FIX DROP is a real-time order and execution update message
that is sent to a Member after an order been received/modified or an
execution has occurred and contains trade details specific to that
Member. The information includes, among other things, the following:
(i) executions; (ii) cancellations; (iii) modifications to an
existing order; and (iv) busts or post-trade corrections. See
Options 3, Section 23(b)(3).
\112\ CTI is a real-time cleared trade update message that is
sent to a Member after an execution has occurred and contains trade
details specific to that Member. The information includes, among
other things, the following: (i) The Clearing Member Trade Agreement
(``CMTA'') or The Options Clearing Corporation (``OCC'') number;
(ii) badge or mnemonic; (iii) account number; (iv) information which
identifies the transaction type (e.g., auction type) for billing
purposes; and (v) market participant capacity. See Options 3,
Section 23(b)(1).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
In connection with its proposal to retire TradeInfo, the Exchange
also proposes to eliminate all references to TradeInfo in Options 7
(Pricing Schedule). Today, as set forth in Options 7, Section 6(ii)(3),
the Exchange does not charge any fees for TradeInfo. With the proposed
changes, the Exchange will amend Options 7 to delete Section 6(ii)(3)
in its entirety.
Optional Risk Protections
The Exchange proposes to introduce optional quantity and notional
value checks in new Options 3, Section 28, entitled ``Optional Risk
Protections.'' The proposed optional order risk protections will be
functionally identical to the protections currently offered by BX.\113\
Members may use this voluntary functionality through their FIX
protocols to limit the quantity and notional value they can send per
order and on aggregate for the day. Specifically, Members may establish
limits for the following parameters, as set forth in proposed
subparagraphs (a)(1)-(4):
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\113\ See BX Options 3, Section 28. While BX's rule does not
contain the level of granularity as proposed in the Exchange's rule,
including how orders are rejected if any of the optional risk
protection values are exceeded, the Exchange understands that BX's
optional risk protections operate in the same manner.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Notional dollar value per order, which will be calculated as
quantity multiplied by limit price multiplied by number of underlying
shares;
(2) Daily aggregate notional dollar value;
(3) Quantity per order; and
(4) Daily aggregate quantity
Proposed paragraph (b) will provide that Members may elect one or
more of the above optional risk protections by contacting Market
Operations and providing a per order value (for (a)(1) and (a)(3)) or
daily aggregate value (for (a)(2) and (a)(4)) for each order
protection. Members may modify their settings through Market
Operations. Proposed paragraph (c) will provide that the System will
reject all incoming aggregated Member orders for any of the (a)(2) and
(a)(4) risk protections after the value configured by the Member is
exceeded. Proposed paragraph (d) will provide that the System will
reject all incoming Member orders for any of the (a)(1) and (a)(3) risk
protections upon
[[Page 61407]]
arrival if the value configured by the Member is exceeded by the
incoming order. The Exchange notes that the difference in handling
between aggregate and individual order protections is necessary to
allow for complete processing of the final order that puts a Member's
configured value over the aggregate values configured. While individual
orders can be directly measured against the configured values for
(a)(1) and (a)(3), the aggregate values must be calculated after
complete processing of an order and thus the rejection of orders begins
upon the arrival of the next order after the aggregate values in (a)(2)
or (a)(4) have been exceeded.
The following example shows how the System will reject all
subsequent incoming aggregated orders after the (a)(2) or (a)(4) values
configured by the Member have been exceeded:
Aggregate Quantity Limit = 800.
1. Member enters an Order to Buy 500--Accepted
2. Member enters an Order to Buy 400--Accepted (Member did not meet the
configured limit of 800 with the first order of 500 at the time Member
entered the second order)
3. Member enters an Order to Buy 1--Rejected (Member already exceeded
the configured limit of 800 with the second order of 400)
The following example shows how the System will reject all incoming
orders upon arrival if the (a)(1) or (a)(3) values configured by the
Member have been exceeded by the arriving order:
Quantity per Order Limit = 800.
1. Member enters an Order to Buy 801--Rejected (Member exceeded the
Quantity per order limit upon arrival with the order to buy 801
contracts)
Proposed paragraph (e) will provide that if a Member sets a
notional dollar value, a Market Order would not be accepted from that
Member. This is because notional dollar value is calculated by using an
order's specified limit price, and Market Orders by definition are
priced at the best available price upon execution. Lastly, proposed
paragraph (f) will provide that the proposed risk protections are only
available for orders entered through FIX. Additionally, all of the
proposed settings will be firm-level.
2. Statutory Basis
The Exchange believes that its proposal is consistent with Section
6(b) of the Act,\114\ in general, and furthers the objectives of
Section 6(b)(5) of the Act,\115\ in particular, in that it is designed
to promote just and equitable principles of trade, to remove
impediments to and perfect the mechanism of a free and open market and
a national market system, and, in general to protect investors and the
public interest. As it relates to the elimination of fees for flash
functionality and TradeInfo, the Exchange believes that its proposal is
consistent with Section 6(b) of the Act,\116\ in general, and furthers
the objectives of Sections 6(b)(4) and 6(b)(5) of the Act,\117\ in
particular, in that it provides for the equitable allocation of
reasonable dues, fees, and other charges among members and issuers and
other persons using any facility, and is not designed to permit unfair
discrimination between customers, issuers, brokers, or dealers.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\114\ 15 U.S.C. 78f(b).
\115\ 15 U.S.C. 78f(b)(5).
\116\ 15 U.S.C. 78f(b).
\117\ 15 U.S.C. 78f(b)(4) and (5).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Generally, the Exchange's proposal is intended to add or align
certain System functionality with functionality currently offered on BX
in order to provide a more consistent technology offering across
affiliated Nasdaq options exchanges. A more harmonized technology
offering, in turn, will simplify technology implementation, changes,
and maintenance by market participants of the Exchange that are also
participants on Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges. The Exchange's
proposal also seeks to provide greater harmonization between the rules
of the Exchange and its affiliates, which would result in greater
uniformity, and less burdensome and more efficient regulatory
compliance by market participants. As such, the proposal would foster
cooperation and coordination with persons engaged in facilitating
transactions in securities and would remove impediments to and perfect
the mechanism of a free and open market and a national market system.
The Exchange believes that more consistent rules will increase the
understanding of the Exchange's operations for market participants that
are also participants on the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges,
thereby contributing to the protection of investors and the public
interest. The proposal also seeks to memorialize existing functionality
and add more granularity in the Exchange's rules to describe how
existing functionality operates today. The Exchange believes that such
changes would remove impediments to and perfect the mechanism of a free
and open market and a national market system because the proposed
changes would promote transparency in Exchange rules and reducing
potential confusion, thereby ensuring that Members, regulators, and the
public can more easily navigate the Exchange's rulebook and better
understand how options trading is conducted on the Exchange.
Routing Changes
The Exchange believes that the proposed amendments throughout
Options 3 and Options 7 to conform to the Routing Filing is consistent
with the Act. As discussed above, the Routing Filing harmonizes the
Exchange's routing functionality with that of BX.\118\ As part of this
harmonization, the Routing Filing adopts or harmonizes routing
strategies on the Exchange that are substantially identical to BX,
(DNR, FIND, and SRCH), and eliminates existing Exchange routing
functionality that BX does not offer today (flash functionality and
Sweep Orders). The proposed changes to Options 3 and Options 7 herein
will therefore ensure that the Rules conform to the amendments in the
Routing Filing by removing references to flash functionality and Sweep
Orders, eliminating do-not-route orders as an order type and describing
it instead as a DNR routing strategy to harmonize with BX, and also
making clear which routing strategies may now be utilized when
submitting an order type. The Exchange believes that the proposed
changes will bring greater clarity to the Rulebook, which would benefit
market participants and investors by reducing potential confusion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\118\ As discussed above, the Routing Filing was filed by ISE to
amend ISE Options 5. Because MRX Options 5 incorporates ISE Options
5 by reference, amendments to ISE Options 5 are accordingly
integrated as amendments to MRX Options 5. See supra note 3.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange's proposal to remove pricing related to flash
functionality from Options 7 is reasonable, equitable, and not unfairly
discriminatory because flash functionality would no longer be available
to any Member. It is reasonable to remove the fees related to flash
orders and the references to flash orders from the Exchange's Pricing
Schedule as the Exchange is removing this functionality from its
Rulebook. Additionally, it is equitable and not unfairly discriminatory
to remove the fees related to flash orders and the references to flash
orders from the Pricing Schedule because no Member would be able to
utilize the flash functionality once it is removed from the System.
[[Page 61408]]
Bulk Message
The Exchange believes that its proposal to memorialize its bulk
message functionality is consistent with the Act as it will codify
existing functionality, thereby promoting transparency in the
Exchange's rules and reducing any potential confusion.\119\ This
functionality provides Market Makers with an additional tool to meet
their various quoting obligations in a manner they deem appropriate,
consistent with the purpose of the bulk message functionality to
facilitate Market Makers' provision of liquidity. By providing Market
Makers with additional control over the quotes they use to provide
liquidity to the Exchange, this tool may benefit all investors through
additional execution opportunities at potentially improved prices. As
noted above, other options exchanges like Cboe currently offer similar
bulk messaging functionality that allow their market participants to
submit block quantity quotes in a single electronic message.\120\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\119\ As discussed above, this existing functionality is
currently described in the Exchange's publicly available technical
specifications. See supra note 13.
\120\ See supra note 16.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange does not believe that the offering the bulk message
functionality to only Market Makers would permit unfair discrimination.
Market Makers play a unique and critical role in the options market by
providing liquidity and active markets, and are subject to various
quoting obligations (which other market participants are not, including
obligations to maintain active markets, update quotes in response to
changed market conditions, to compete with other Market Makers in its
appointed classes, and to provide intra-day quotes in its appointed
classes.\121\ Bulk message functionality provides Market Makers with a
means to help them satisfy these obligations.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\121\ See Options 2, Sections 4 and 5.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Order Types
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the rules
governing Exchange order types are consistent with the Act. As
discussed above, the proposed changes consist of several functional
enhancements to align the Exchange's order types to existing BX order
types, and rule adjustments that add more specificity and clarity to
existing order types.
Market Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the definition
of Market Orders in Options 3, Section 7(a) are consistent with the
Act. The proposed intra-day cancel timer feature mirrors existing BX
functionality in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(5), and would provide
Members with additional flexibility and control to bring the Market
Order back to the Member so they can get an execution on another venue
by canceling unexecuted Market Orders after a certain period of time.
The Exchange believes it is appropriate to offer this feature intra-day
because the Exchange already has a separate opening delay timer that
provides protection to the market during the Opening Process as
discussed above.
Intermarket Sweep Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the definition
of ISOs in Options 3, Section 7(b)(5) are consistent with the Act. As
discussed above, the proposed changes are intended to add more
granularity and more closely align the level of detail in the ISO rule
with BX's ISO rule in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(6) by specifying how
the Exchange would handle ISOs, including how ISOs may be submitted and
when. As such, the Exchange believes that its proposal will promote
transparency in the Exchange's rules and consistency across the rules
of the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges.\122\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\122\ As noted above, BX's ISO rule also currently states that
``ISOs may be entered on the Order Book or into the PRISM Mechanism
pursuant to Options 3, Section 13(ii)(K).'' The Exchange will file a
separate rule change to add similar language as BX relating to how
ISOs may be entered on the Exchange.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Furthermore, the proposed changes do not amend current ISO
functionality except for the proposed stipulation that ISOs must have a
TIF designation of IOC. Today, Options 5, Section 1(h) provides that
ISOs may be either an IOC or an order that expires on the day it is
entered. The Exchange believes it is appropriate to no longer allow
non-IOC ISOs, as an ISO is generally used when trying to sweep a price
level across multiple exchanges in an effort to post the balance of an
order without locking an away market. The Exchange therefore believes
that ISOs have a limited purpose and should be cancelled if they do not
execute or do not entirely execute. This is also consistent with how BX
currently handles ISOs in that BX only allows ISOs to be entered as
IOC.
All-or-None Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the definition
of AON Orders in Options 3, Section 7(c) are consistent with the Act.
As discussed above, the Exchange is memorializing current System
behavior by specifying how AON Orders will execute against multiple,
aggregated orders to align with the level of detail in BX Options 3,
Section 7(a)(4)(A). The proposed description of the handling of AON
Orders is consistent with the Exchange's allocation methodology in
Options 3, Section 10 by making clear that because of the size
contingency of the AON Order (i.e., executed in its entirety or not at
all), those orders must be satisfied simultaneously to avoid any
priority conflict on the order book, which considers current displayed
NBBO prices to avoid locked and crossed markets as well as trade-
throughs. Finally, the proposed changes to add that AON Orders may not
be submitted during the Opening Process will better articulate current
System behavior, and aligns to the level of detail currently in BX's
AON rule at BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(7).
Stop and Stop Limit Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the definition
of Stop Orders and Stop Limit Orders in Options 3, Sections 7(d) and
7(e), respectively, are consistent with the Act. The Exchange is
proposing to codify current System behavior by adding that Stop Orders
and Stop Limit Orders will be cancelled if they are immediately
electable upon receipt. As discussed above, the purpose of each of
these order types is to not execute upon entry, and instead rest in the
System until the market reaches a certain price level, at which time
the order could be executed. A Stop Order or Stop Limit Order that is
immediately electable upon receipt would therefore negate the purpose
of this order type, so the Exchange believes it is appropriate to
cancel such orders to ensure that Members are able to use these order
types to achieve their intended purpose. As noted above, the proposed
changes to codify current Stop and Stop Limit Order handling will align
the Exchange's rules with Phlx's Stop and Stop Limit Order rules.\123\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\123\ See supra notes 34 and 36.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to specify current
System functionality that Stop and Stop Limit Orders may only be
entered into FIX will make clear that these order types are only
available to be entered
[[Page 61409]]
through one of the two order entry protocols offered by the Exchange
(i.e., FIX and OTTO). As such, the proposed changes will promote
transparency in the Exchange's rules and reduce any potential
confusion.
Cancel and Replace Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the rule
governing Cancel and Replace Orders would promote clarity and make the
rules easier to navigate. As discussed above, these are non-substantive
changes to relocate the rule from Supplementary Material .02 to Options
3, Section 7 into the main body of the order types rule at Options 3,
Section 7(f), updating incorrect cross-cites therein, and adding more
granularity around how the Exchange will treat the cancellation and
replacement of Reserve Orders.
Reserve Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the Reserve
Order rule at Options 3, Section 7(g) are consistent with the Act. The
Exchange is proposing to add more granularity around how Members may
elect to refresh the display quantity for the Reserve Order. The
Exchange notes that the new rule text does not have any impact on the
priority rules of the displayed or non-displayed portion of the Reserve
Order. This refresh feature for Reserve Orders is intended to provide
more flexibility and opportunities for Members to add displayed
liquidity to the Exchange, which, in turn, benefits all market
participants through more trading opportunities and enhanced price
discovery. As discussed above, the proposed changes do not amend
current functionality, but rather is intended to promote transparency
around the current operation of Reserve Orders. Further, the Exchange
believes that the non-substantive changes in the Reserve Order rule to
renumber and reformat the paragraphs therein, and make corrective
changes as described above, are consistent with the protection of
investors and the public interest because they will simply make the
Exchange's rules easier to navigate, thereby reducing any potential
confusion. As noted above, other options exchanges like Cboe currently
offer Reserve Orders that have similar refresh features.\124\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\124\ See supra note 39.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attributable Orders
The Exchange believes that it is consistent with the Act to delete
existing rule text in Options 3, Section 7(h), which currently
indicates that Attributable Orders may be available for specified
classes of securities, and to make a corrective change to ``an Options
Trader Alert.'' Because Attributable Orders are available for all
classes of securities today, the Exchange is deleting this language as
inaccurate. The Exchange believes that the proposed changes will
promote transparency in the Exchange's rules.
Customer Cross Orders
The Exchange believes that the non-substantive amendment in Options
3, Section 7(i) to add that Customer Cross Orders may trade in
accordance with Options 3, Section 12(a) is consistent with the
protection of investors and the public interest because the proposal
will simply add a cross reference in the Customer Cross Order rule to
Section 12(a), which currently describes in detail how this order type
would execute on the Exchange, thereby adding clarity to how Customer
Cross Orders function today.
Qualified Contingent Cross Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the QCC Order
rule in Options 3, Section 7(j) to add a reference to ``QCC'' and to
provide that QCC Orders will trade in accordance with Options 3,
Section 12(c) are consistent with the Act because the changes are
merely intended to add greater clarity to how QCC Orders function
today. The Exchange further believes that specifying that QCC Orders
may only be entered through FIX will better articulate current System
behavior, and will make clear that QCC Orders are available to be
entered through only one of the two order entry protocols currently
offered by the Exchange (i.e., FIX and OTTO), thereby reducing any
potential confusion.
Preferenced Orders
The Exchange believes that its proposal to add a definition of
Preferenced Orders in Options 3, Section 7(l) is consistent with the
Act. While Preferenced Orders are currently described in Options 2,
Section 10, the Exchange believes that it would be useful to have order
types centralized within one rule to make the Rulebook easier to
navigate for market participants. As noted above, Phlx similarly lists
out Directed Orders (akin to Preferenced Orders) in its order types
rule at Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(11).
Add Liquidity Orders
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the ALO rule in
Options 3, Section 7(n) are consistent with the Act. As discussed
above, the Exchange is enhancing current ALO functionality to reflect
that the Exchange will handle ALOs in a consistent manner with the new
continuous re-pricing mechanism that is being proposed concurrently in
the Re-Pricing Filing as proposed Options 3, Section 5(d) in situations
where the ALO would not lock or cross an order or quote on the System,
but would lock or cross the NBBO.\125\ The Exchange therefore believes
that the proposed changes will make clear how the Exchange will handle
ALOs under the new re-pricing mechanism. The ALO order type was adopted
to provide market participants greater control over the circumstances
in which their orders are executed. As noted above, the purpose of an
ALO is to provide liquidity. For investors and market participants that
elect only to provide liquidity in certain circumstances, such as to
receive a maker fee (or rebate) upon execution of an order, the
Exchange continues to believe that ALOs, as amended under this
proposal, will continue to accommodate this strategy. The proposed
order handling for ALOs is consistent with how ALOs are handled on BX
today.\126\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\125\ See supra note 45.
\126\ See BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(12).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange also believes that adding ``or quotes'' in the ALO
rule at Options 3, Section 7(n) is consistent with the Act. Today, if
at the time of entry, an ALO would lock or cross one or more non-
displayed orders or quotes on the Exchange, the ALO will be cancelled
or re-priced in the manner specified within the ALO rule. Adding this
rule text will bring greater clarity around current ALO behavior.
The Exchange further believes that the proposed addition that ALOs
may only be submitted when an options series is open for trading will
make clear ALOs will not be accepted during the Opening Process as the
order book is not available. The proposed changes codify existing
System behavior, and will therefore promote transparency in the
Exchange's rules.
QCC With Stock Orders
The Exchange believes that the non-substantive change to correct a
cross-cite in the QCC with Stock Order rule in Options 3, Section 7(t)
will promote clarity in the Exchange's rules.
Opening Sweep
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the Opening
Sweep rule in Options 3, Section 7(u) are consistent with the Act. As
discussed
[[Page 61410]]
above, the Exchange is codifying current System behavior and providing
additional context to the rule in a manner that is consistent with
Phlx's Opening Sweep rule in Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(6). The
Exchange therefore believes that the proposed changes promote greater
transparency in the Exchange's rules and consistency across the rules
of the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges. Specifically, because an
Opening Sweep is an IOC order submitted by a Market Maker during the
Opening Process, the Exchange is making clear that Opening Sweeps are
entered though SQF in the proposed rule text. The Exchange also
believes that it is appropriate to specify that Opening Sweeps are not
subject to any risk protections in Options 3, Section 15 (except
Automated Quotation Adjustments) because the Opening Process itself has
boundaries (notably, the Quality Opening Market and the Opening Quote
Range) within which orders will be executed. Finally, the proposed
language relating to Opening Sweep participation in the Opening Process
and cancellation upon the open merely provides additional context in
the order type rule. As noted above, Opening Sweeps are already
described in the opening rule today in Options 3, Section 8, and apply
only during the Opening Process.
Time in Force
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the TIF rules
are consistent with the Act. As discussed above, the Exchange believes
that certain existing functionality currently described as an ``order
type'' in Options 3, Section 7 would be more precisely described as a
TIF attribute that designates the basic parameters of an order type.
Relocating and centralizing the existing TIF rules into proposed
Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3, Section 7 will therefore
clearly delineate these order attributes and make the proposed rules
easier to navigate. Codifying the definition of ``TIF'' in proposed
Supplementary Material .02 will add greater clarity and transparency to
the Exchange's rules in a manner consistent with BX Options 3, Section
7(b).
The Exchange believes that the adjustments in proposed
Supplementary Material .02(a) to Options 3, Section 7 to add that Day
orders may be entered through FIX or OTTO will add further granularity
and clarity to the Exchange's rules. The proposed changes provide
additional detail about current functionality in a manner that is
consistent with the level of detail in BX's Day order.\127\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\127\ See supra note 51.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that the adjustments to the relocated GTC and
GTD rules in proposed Supplementary Material .02(b) and (c) will add
further granularity and clarity to how these TIFs operate today. The
Exchange further believes that aligning the level of detail in the GTD
rule to the GTC rule, as described above, is appropriate because these
two TIFs are meant to be functionally similar except the manner in
which they persist in the System.
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the relocated
IOC rule in proposed Supplementary Material .02(d) will promote greater
transparency in the Exchange's rules by providing more granularity to
current IOC functionality. Further, the changes conform the Exchange's
IOC rule to BX's IOC rule, thereby promoting consistency across the
rules of the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges. Specifically, the
proposed changes to remove the word ``limit'' will make clear that IOC
orders may be sent as either a Market or Limit Order today, identical
to BX IOC orders.\128\ The proposed changes to state that IOC orders
are not eligible for routing, and that IOC orders may be entered
through FIX, OTTO, or SQF, will codify current IOC behavior in a manner
that is consistent with BX's IOC rule.\129\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\128\ See supra note 52.
\129\ See supra notes 53--54.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As it relates to the proposed changes to memorialize the various
risk protections that are excluded from applying to Market Maker IOC
orders entered through SQF, the Exchange believes this is appropriate
because only Market Makers utilize SQF to enter IOC orders. As
discussed above, Market Makers are professional traders with more
sophisticated infrastructures than other market participants, and are
able to manage their risk through their own risk settings in addition
to the risk protections required by the Exchange. The Exchange will
continue to apply the specified risk protections on IOC orders entered
through FIX and OTTO, which are used by the other market participants.
The proposed changes will harmonize the Exchange's IOC rule with BX's
IOC rule.\130\ Further, the proposal to add substantially similar
exclusionary language into the SQF rule itself at Supplementary
Material .03(c) to Options 3, Section 7 will make clear that these risk
protections will not apply to IOC orders entered through SQF.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\130\ See supra notes 59--60.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specifying in the proposed IOC rule that orders entered into the
Exchange's various auction and crossing mechanisms are considered to
have a TIF of IOC memorializes current System behavior, and is intended
to bring greater transparency in how these order types are handled
today. As noted above, BX currently has substantially similar language
in its IOC rule for BX PRISM orders in BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(2).
Lastly, the Exchange believes that the adjustments to the relocated
OPG rule in proposed Supplementary Material .02(e) to Options 3,
Section 7 will add granularity and clarity to how OPG orders operate,
and will conform the OPG rule with the level of detail currently in
BX's OPG rule in BX Options 3, Section 7(b)(1). As discussed above, the
Exchange is proposing to enhance OPG functionality to allow both Market
and Limit OPG orders whereas today, only Limit OPG orders are allowed.
This harmonizes OPG functionality with BX OPG functionality. The other
modifications to replace ``opening rotation'' with ``Opening Process,''
stating OPG orders may not route, and indicating that OPG orders are
not subject to the protections listed in Options 3, Section 15 (except
Size Limitation) all memorialize current OPG behavior, and align to the
current BX OPG rule. As discussed above, the Exchange does not apply
any of the risk protections in Options 3, Section 15 (except Size
Limitation) because the Opening Process itself has boundaries within
which orders will be executed.
Opening Process
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the Opening
Process in Options 3, Section 8 are consistent with the Act. As
discussed above, the Exchange is proposing to remove the current
limitation that only allows Public Customers interest to route during
the opening, and will instead allow all market participant interest to
route. The proposed changes will serve to more closely align the
Exchange's Opening Process with BX's Opening Process. Like BX, the
Exchange believes that it will be beneficial to provide all market
participants with the opportunity to have their interest executed on
away markets during the Opening Process. The Exchange further believes
that the related changes to remove references to ``Public Customer''
throughout Options 3, Section 8, and to update the cross-cite currently
pointing to the Priority Customer priority overlay to the more general
priority rule, will add clarity, transparency, and internal consistency
to Exchange rules regarding
[[Page 61411]]
the proposed handling of routable interest during the Opening Process.
The Exchange believes that its proposal to no longer round in the
direction of the previous trading day's closing price and simply round
up to the MPV, if the mid-point of the highest and lowest of the
Potential Opening Prices is not expressed as a permitted MPV, will
simplify and bring greater transparency to the Opening Process, to the
benefit of investors. Market participants can now have a better sense
of how the Potential Opening Price will be calculated without having to
account for the closing price of each options series. The Exchange
believes this may promote greater efficiency in the marketplace
especially in view of the continued growth in the number of options
today.
The Exchange further believes that the proposed changes to replace
``are marketable against the ABBO'' with ``cross the ABBO'' will better
articulate how the Exchange currently determines the OQR boundaries in
the scenario specified in Options 3, Section 8(i)(3).
Auction Mechanisms
Facilitation and Solicited Order Mechanisms
The Exchange believes that its proposal to relocate the rule text
relating to Responses from Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3,
Section 11 into the introductory paragraph of Options 3, Section 11,
and adding that Responses can be modified, is consistent with the Act.
The Exchange is relocating this language into the introductory
paragraph of Options 3, Section 11 after the definition of ``Response''
for better readability. The proposed change to add ``or modified'' to
indicate that Responses may be canceled or modified any time prior to
execution better aligns the rule text to current System behavior. As
noted above, the rules for the complex Facilitation and Solicited Order
Mechanisms in Options 3, Sections 11(c)(7) and (e)(4), respectively,
already provide for this concept.
Price Improvement Mechanism
The Exchange's proposal to amend Options 3, Section 13(b)(4) to
clarify the current rule text by adding the words ``or modified'' after
``canceled'' is consistent with the Act because the additional text
will make clear that a Crossing Transaction may not be modified unless
the Counter-Side Order is being improved during the exposure period.
The Exchange's proposal to add clarifying rule text within Options
3, Section 13(b)(5) which states, ``Crossing Transactions submitted at
or before the opening of trading are not eligible to initiate an
Auction and will be rejected'' is consistent with the Act because it
will bring greater clarity to when a Crossing Transaction is currently
eligible to initiate a PIM. The PIM considers both the NBBO and local
book for its entry price validation and therefore requires an opening
for the PIM to begin.
The Exchange's proposal to amend the current PIM functionality
within Options 3, Section 13(c)(3) to permit Improvement Orders to be
canceled or modified is consistent with the Act. The Exchange proposes
to amend this functionality so that Improvement Orders may be canceled
or modified similar to functionality on BX today within Options 3,
Section 13(ii)(a)(8). Today, during the exposure period, Improvement
Orders may not be canceled and Improvement Orders may be modified to
(i) increase the size at the same price, or (ii) improve the price of
the Improvement Order for any size up to the size of the Agency Order.
The modification and cancellation of an Improvement Order through OTTO
will be similar to the manner in which a Cancel and Replace Order would
be handled outside of the auction process. For Improvement Orders
through SQF, the modification and cancellation of such orders will be
handled by sending new Improvement Orders that overwrite the existing
Improvement Order with updated price/quantity instructions. Improvement
Orders are not visible to other auction participants, including the
Agency Order. The Exchange believes that providing responders with
flexibility to cancel or modify their Improvement Orders may encourage
market participants to respond to more auctions, including PIM.
The proposal to amend Options 3, Section 13(d)(5) to permit an
auction to automatically terminate upon the occurrence of a trading
halt with execution solely with the Counter-Side Order is consistent
with the Act. This functionality would be similar to rule text within
BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C). The Exchange believes that utilizing
the price of the Counter-Side Order to execute the Crossing Transaction
promotes just and equitable principles of trade, and fosters
cooperation and coordination with persons engaged in facilitating
transactions in securities since the Counter-Side Order has guaranteed
that an execution will occur at the same price as the Crossing
Transaction, or better, prior to the trading halt, and Improvement
Orders offer no such guarantee, the Counter-Side Order is the only
valid price at which to execute the Crossing Transactions, and the
Counter-Side Order is the appropriate contra-side.\131\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\131\ The Exchange notes that trading on the Exchange in any
option contract will be halted whenever trading in the underlying
security has been paused or halted by the primary listing market.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that the proposed System change to adopt a
new same side execution price check for PIM in new subsection (d)(6) of
Options 3, Section 13 is consistent with the Act. As discussed above,
this feature would be functionally identical to BX PRISM in BX Options
3, Section 13(ii)(I). Like BX, the proposed price check is designed to
ensure that the Exchange would not trade at prices that would lock or
cross interest on the same side of the market as the Agency Order where
limit orders have rested and obtained priority to execute at that
price. In the event where a limit order arrives on the same side of the
market as the Agency Order and is at the same or better price than the
initiating Crossing Transaction price, the Exchange would execute the
entire PIM transaction at the initiating Crossing Transaction price.
The execution takes place at this price because the PIM is guaranteed
an execution and the PIM agency side instructions would not allow an
execution to take place at a higher (lower) price than submitted for a
buying (selling) agency side PIM order. Considering that the limit
order has arrived either at or better on the same side as the Agency
Order than the agency side price, the initiating Crossing Transaction
price is the only price at which the guaranteed execution can take
place.
The Exchange's proposal to amend Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) to
permit Improvement Complex Orders to be canceled or modified is
consistent with the Act. Further, similar to the proposed change for
simple PIM, the Exchange notes that the modification and cancellation
of an Improvement Complex Order will be similar to the manner in which
a Cancel and Replace Order would be handled outside of the auction
process. Improvement Complex Orders are not visible to other auction
participants, including the Agency Complex Order. Further, similar to
the proposed changes for simple PIM, the Exchange believes that
providing responders with flexibility to cancel or modify their
Improvement Complex Orders may encourage market participants to respond
to more auctions, including Complex PIM.
The Exchange's proposal to amend Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(iv) at
new
[[Page 61412]]
``(D)'' to provide that the exposure period for a Complex PIM will
automatically terminate when a resting Complex Order in the same
complex strategy on either side of the market becomes marketable
against the Complex Order Book or bids and offers for the individual
legs is consistent with the Act. The proposed changes will codify
current System behavior and will provide greater transparency to market
participants for situations in which early termination would occur for
Complex PIMs today. As noted above, Complex Order Exposure currently
early terminates in similar situations, so the proposed language for
Complex PIM closely tracks existing Complex Exposure language in
Supplementary Material .01(b)(ii) to Options 3, Section 14.\132\ The
Exchange believes that it is appropriate to early terminate Complex PIM
under these circumstances for the following reasons. When the resting
Complex Order is on the same side as the Agency Complex Order, interest
that becomes marketable against the resting Complex Order would also be
marketable against the Complex PIM order. Therefore, early terminating
the Complex PIM would allow the Complex PIM order to interact with this
interest given that the Complex PIM order is at a superior price
compared to the resting Complex Order, thus providing an opportunity
for price improvement for the Agency Complex Order. Additionally, when
the resting Complex Order is on the opposite side of the Agency Complex
Order, interest that arrives marketable against the resting Complex
Order is now at a superior price to the Agency Complex Order. The
Exchange would therefore early terminate in this scenario and execute
the Complex PIM order with its contra side order because it is no
longer at top of book.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\132\ Supplementary Material .01(b)(ii) of MRX Options 3,
Section 14 provides: ``The exposure period for a Complex Order will
end immediately: (A) upon the receipt of a Complex Order for the
same complex strategy on either side of the market that is
marketable against the Complex Order Book or bids and offers for the
individual legs; (B) upon the receipt of a non-marketable Complex
Order for the same complex strategy on the same side of the market
that would cause the price of the exposed Complex Order to be
outside of the best bid or offer for the same complex strategy on
the Complex Order Book; or (C) when a resting Complex Order for the
same complex strategy on either side of the market becomes
marketable against interest on the Complex Order book or bids and
offers for same individual legs of the complex strategy.''
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange's proposal to relocate the last sentence of Options 3,
Section 13(e)(3) into Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(iv) at new ``(E)'' is
consistent with the Act. This non-substantive amendment will relocate
the rule text to a more logical place within the Complex PIM rule.
The Exchange believes that its proposal to codify existing Complex
PIM behavior in Options 3, Section 13(e)(5) to articulate that the
complex mid-way price will be rounded to the $0.01 increment that
favors the Agency Complex Order will promote clarity and transparency
in the Exchange's rules by better aligning the rule text with the
current operation of the System. As noted above, the simple PIM rule
already articulates that the mid-way price will be rounded to the $0.01
increment that favors the Agency Order in Options 3, Section 13(d)(4).
The rounding for Complex PIM currently operates the same way as simple
PIM in this respect, so the proposed Complex PIM language closely
tracks the simple PIM language.
Finally, the proposal to amend Supplementary Material .02 to
Options 3, Section 15 to add a sentence which provides, ``It will be
considered a violation of this Rule and will be deemed conduct
inconsistent with just and equitable principles of trade and a
violation of Options 9, Section 1 if an Electronic Access Member
submits a PIM Order (initiating an auction) and also submits its own
Improvement Order in the same auction,'' is consistent with the Act. BX
has a similar prohibition within Options 3, Section 13(iii). The
proposed new rule is designed to prevent fraudulent and manipulative
acts and practices, to promote just and equitable principles of trade,
by providing guidance to Members where certain behavior within a PIM
will not be considered a bona fide transaction.
Order Price Protection
The Exchange believes that its proposal to replace its current
Limit Order Price Protection with a similar ``fat finger'' check called
Order Price Protection in Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A) is consistent
with the Act. The proposed OPP would similarly prevent the execution of
limit orders at prices outside pre-set numerical or percentage
parameters, and is designed to prevent limit orders entered at clearly
unintended prices from executing in the System to the detriment of
market participants. The proposed risk protection is also functionally
similar to BX's OPP in BX Options 3, Section 15(a)(1), and therefore is
not novel.\133\ Similar to BX, the Exchange believes that the proposed
fixed dollar amount and percentage parameters will protect against
erroneous executions, while also allowing orders to execute within a
reasonable range.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\133\ As noted above, the Exchange is proposing to adopt an OPP
rule that more accurately describes the proposed functionality than
BX's current OPP rule, so BX will align its current OPP rule to the
Exchange's proposed rule text in a separate rule filing.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that using the Reference BBO (i.e., better of
the NBBO or the internal market BBO) to calculate the proposed OPP,
identical to current BX OPP functionality, will similarly protect
investors and the public interest where the internal market BBO is
better than the NBBO.
The Exchange further believes that its proposal to add language
allowing Exchange discretion to temporarily deactivate OPP on an intra-
day basis is consistent with the Act. BX has identical language today
in BX Options 3, Section 15(a)(1)(A)(i), and similar to BX, the
Exchange believes that having this discretion will be useful if the
Exchange determined that unusual market conditions warranted
deactivation in the interest of a fair and orderly market. Like BX, the
Exchange believes that it will be useful to have the flexibility to
temporarily disable OPP intra-day in response to an unusual market
event (e.g., if dissemination of data was delayed and resulted in
unreliable underlying values needed for the Reference BBO) to maintain
a fair and orderly market. This will promote just and equitable
principles of trade and ultimately protect investors.
Post-Only Quoting Protection
The Exchange's proposal to adopt a new Post-Only Quote
Configuration in Options 3, Section 15(a)(3)(C) to permit Market Makers
to prevent their quotes from removing liquidity from the Exchange's
order book promotes equitable principles of trade and protects
investors and the public interest by enhancing the risk protections
available to Market Makers. This optional risk protection would enable
Market Maker to better manage their risk when quoting on the Exchange.
As noted above, BX offers identical functionality today in BX Options
3, Section 15(c)(3).
The proposed risk protection allows Market Makers the ability to
avoid removing liquidity from the Exchange's order book if their quote
would otherwise lock or cross any resting order or quote on the
Exchange's order book upon entry, thereby protecting investors and the
general public as Market Makers transact a large number of orders on
the Exchange and bring liquidity to the marketplace. Market Makers
would utilize the proposed risk protection to avoid unintentionally
taking liquidity
[[Page 61413]]
with resting interest \134\ on the order book. As a result of taking
liquidity, Market Makers would incur a taker fee that may impact the
Market Maker's ability to provide liquidity and meet quoting
obligations. Market Makers are required to add liquidity on the
Exchange and, in turn, are rewarded with lower pricing \135\ and
enhanced allocations.\136\ Specifically, the risk protection would
permit Market Makers to add liquidity only and avoid removing resting
interest on the order book, which will lead to enhanced liquidity on
the Exchange and in turn will benefit and protect investors and the
public interest through the potential for greater volumes of orders and
executions on the Exchange.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\134\ As noted above, this would include any re-priced orders as
described in the Re-Pricing Filing as proposed Options 3, Section
5(d), ALOs as described in proposed Options 3, Section 7(n), and any
re-priced quotes as described in Options 3, Section 4(b)(6). As
discussed above, ALOs may re-price.
\135\ See Options 7, Section 3.
\136\ See Options 3, Section 10.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange does not believe that introducing this Post-Only Quote
Configuration will unfairly discriminate among market participants.
Today, all Members may utilize the existing Add Liquidity Order type to
prevent orders from removing liquidity from the Exchange's order book
upon entry. The Post-Only Quote Configuration is available to Market
Makers only as a risk protection. Unlike other market participants,
Market Makers have certain obligations on the market, such as
requirements to provide continuous two-sided quotes on a daily basis
\137\ and are subject to various obligations associated with providing
liquidity on the market.\138\ Market Makers are liquidity providers on
the Exchange and, therefore, are offered certain quote risk protections
noted to allow them to manage their risk more effectively.\139\ The
proposed Post-Only Quote Configuration is another risk protection
afforded to Market Makers to assist them in managing their risk while
continuing to comply with their obligations. The Exchange notes that
enhancing the ability of Market Makers to add liquidity and avoid
taking liquidity from the order book promotes just and equitable
principles of trade on the Exchange and protects investors and the
public interest, thereby enhancing market structure by allowing Market
Makers to add liquidity only. Greater liquidity benefits all market
participants by providing more trading opportunities and attracting
greater participation by Market Makers. Also, an increase in the
activity of Market Makers in turn facilitates tighter spreads.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\137\ See Options 2, Section 5(e).
\138\ See Options 2, Section 4.
\139\ Options 3, Section 15(a)(3) currently sets forth the Anti-
Internalization and Quotation Adjustments Protections that are
available today to Market Makers.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kill Switch
The Exchange does not believe that the proposed decommission of the
GUI Kill Switch for order cancellation will affect the protection of
investors or the public interest or the maintenance of a fair and
orderly market because no Members have used the GUI Kill Switch risk
protection in 2022.\140\ The Exchange does not charge any fees for the
GUI Kill Switch. In addition, the Exchange notes that the use of this
tool is completely optional, and the Exchange will continue to offer
substantially similar Kill Switch functionality through FIX and OTTO.
As set forth in the Kill Switch rule, the GUI Kill Switch allows for
the cancellation and restriction of orders for the requested
Identifier(s) on a user or group level, whereas the port Kill Switch
allows for cancellation and restriction of orders for the requested
Identifier(s) on a user level.\141\ While the GUI Kill Switch had more
optionality around how Members may combine the Kill Switch request by
Identifier(s), no Members have used the GUI Kill Switch risk protection
this year. Furthermore, Members will retain the ability to contact
market operations staff to manually purge their orders from the market.
In addition, the Exchange will continue to implement System-enforced
risk mechanisms that automatically remove orders for the Member once
certain pre-set thresholds or conditions are met (i.e., market wide
risk protection and cancel on disconnect).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\140\ As noted above, the Exchange has provided notice of the
decommission to all Members via Options Trader Alert. See Options
Trader Alert #2022-30.
\141\ See Options 3, Section 17(a)(1) and (2).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Also, the Exchange believes that the low usage rate for the GUI
Kill Switch does not warrant the continuous resources necessary for
System support of such tools. As a result, the Exchange believes that
the proposal will remove impediments to and perfect the mechanism of a
free and open market and a national market system by allowing the
Exchange to reallocate System capacity and resources currently used to
maintain this functionality to the development and maintenance of other
business initiatives and risk management products.
As noted above, the Exchange previously amended its rules to
decommission the quote removal Kill Switch that was available to Market
Makers through the GUI.\142\ Similar to the GUI Kill Switch for quote
removal, the Exchange has found that no Members use the GUI Kill Switch
to cancel their orders, but rather, utilize other means to purge their
existing orders from the System. The Exchange therefore believes that
eliminating the GUI Kill Switch all together (including for orders as
proposed herein) will streamline the Exchange's risk protection
offerings in a manner that reflects Member use.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\142\ See supra note 99.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data Feeds and Trade Information
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the current data
feed offerings in Options 3, Section 23(a) are consistent with the Act.
Specifically, the Exchange believes that the proposed changes to its
Depth of Market Feed to provide full depth-of-market information will
serve to more closely align the information provided on the Exchange's
Depth of Market Feed with that of BX's Depth of Market Feed in BX
Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), thereby ensuring a more consistent
technology offering across the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges. The
Exchange also believes that the modified Depth of Market Feed will help
to protect a free and open market by providing additional data to the
marketplace. The Exchange further believes that the proposed changes to
add more specificity around what would be provided in the opening/
reopening order imbalance information, and to correct an erroneous
reference to ``ISE'' in the Depth of Market Feed rule will promote
transparency and clarity in the Exchange's rules.
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the Order Feed
around what type of information would be available on this data feed
offering, as further described above, will promote clarity and
transparency in the Exchange's rules. Furthermore, the proposed data
elements in the Order Feed are based on data elements that currently
exist on other markets. For instance, the specificity around what would
be provided in the opening/reopening order imbalance information, as
well as the auction and exposure notifications are identical to the
content within BX's Depth of Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section
23(a)(1). As noted above, the Attributable Order content is similar to
the data elements on Cboe's current multicast PITCH feed.\143\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\143\ See supra note 103.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that the proposed changes to the existing Top
[[Page 61414]]
Quote Feed to rebrand into the Top Feed, to no longer provide
information for opening price, daily trading volume, and high and low
prices for the day, will serve to further align the Exchange's Top Feed
with BX's Top Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(2), thereby ensuring
a more consistent technology offering across the Nasdaq affiliated
options exchanges.
The proposed changes to the Trades Feed to no longer provide
information for opening price, daily trading volume, and high and low
prices for the day are intended to align to the proposed changes to the
Top Feed described above. The Exchange believes that removing this
language will promote clarity and transparency in the Exchange's rules.
The proposed changes to the Spread Feed to provide full depth-of-
book information rather than at the first five price levels are
intended to align to the proposed changes to the Depth of Market Feed
described above. The proposed full depth language will also be
substantially similar to the full depth language in BX's Depth of
Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1) and in the Exchange's
proposed Depth of Market Feed in proposed Options 3, Section 23(a)(1),
except the proposed language herein will be tailored to complex
functionality. Furthermore, the proposed Attributable Complex Order
content is similar to the content currently on Cboe's Complex Multicast
PITCH feed.\144\ The Exchange believes that the modified Spread Feed
will help to protect a free and open market by providing additional
data to the marketplace. The Exchange also believes that the proposed
changes to reorganize and incorporate existing concepts in the Spread
Feed rule a manner that is more consistent with the other amended data
feed rules in Options 3, Section 23(a) will make the rules easier to
navigate for market participants.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\144\ See supra note 108.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange believes that it is consistent with the Act to no
longer offer TradeInfo when the Exchange migrates over the enhanced
Nasdaq functionality, as there is a lack of demand from Members.\145\
The Exchange does not assess a fee for TradeInfo. As noted above,
Members use FIX, FIX DROP, and CTI to obtain order information
currently available in TradeInfo, and to cancel orders through FIX. The
Exchange further believes that the proposed decommission of TradeInfo
will remove impediments to and perfect the mechanism of a free and open
market and a national market system by allowing the Exchange to
reallocate System capacity and resources currently used to maintain
this functionality to the development and maintenance of other business
initiatives and risk management products.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\145\ As noted above, the Exchange provided notice of the
decommission to all Members through an Options Trader Alert. See
Options Trader Alert #2022-29.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange's proposal to eliminate TradeInfo pricing from Options
7, Section 6(ii)(3) in its entirety is reasonable, equitable, and not
unfairly discriminatory because TradeInfo would no longer be available
to any Member. It is reasonable to remove all references to TradeInfo
pricing from the Exchange's Pricing Schedule as the Exchange is
removing this functionality from its Rulebook. As discussed above, the
Exchange does not assess a fee for TradeInfo today. Additionally, it is
equitable and not unfairly discriminatory to remove the references to
TradeInfo pricing from the Pricing Schedule because no Member would be
able to utilize this functionality once it is removed from the System.
Optional Risk Protections
The Exchange believes that introducing the optional quantity and
notional value risk protections as described above will protect
investors and the public interest, and maintain fair and orderly
markets, by providing market participants with another tool to manage
their order risk. As noted above, BX offers functionally identical
optional risk protections in BX Options 3, Section 28.\146\ In
addition, providing Members with more tools for managing risk will
facilitate transactions in securities because Members will have more
confidence that risk protections are in place. As a result, the new
functionality has the potential to promote just and equitable
principles of trade.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\146\ As noted above, while the proposed rule text in Options 3,
Section 28 adds more granularity, including around how orders are
rejected when the value thresholds for the options risk protections
are exceeded, the Exchange understands that the BX optional risk
protections operate in the same manner.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Self-Regulatory Organization's Statement on Burden on Competition
The Exchange does not believe that the proposed rule change will
impose any burden on competition not necessary or appropriate in
furtherance of the purposes of the Act. The Exchange operates in a
competitive market and regularly competes with other options exchanges
for order flow. As discussed above, the Exchange is re-platforming its
System in connection with the technology migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality, which the Exchange believes would promote competition
among options exchanges by potentially attracting additional order flow
to the Exchange with the enhanced trading platform.
As it relates to the elimination of fees for flash functionality
and TradeInfo from Options 7, the Exchange believes that its proposal
does not impose an undue burden on competition because the flash
functionality and TradeInfo would no longer be available to any
Members.
The basis for the majority of the proposed rule changes are the
rules of the Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges, which have been
previously filed with the Commission as consistent with the Act. As it
relates to bulk messaging for quotes as proposed in Options 3, Section
4(b)(3), the Exchange notes that Cboe similarly allows for bulk
messaging in Cboe Rule 1.1, except Cboe also allows bulk messaging for
orders, unlike the Exchange. As it relates to the proposal in Options
3, Section 7(g)(4) to codify the refresh features into the Exchange's
Reserve Order rule, the Exchange notes that Cboe's Reserve Order
functionality has similar refresh features in Cboe Rule 5.6(c). As it
relates to the proposal in Options 3, Section 23(a) to add Attributable
Order and Attributable Complex Order content in the Order Feed and
Spread Feed, respectively, Cboe currently has similar data elements
available on its Multicast PITCH feed and Complex Multicast PITCH
feed.\147\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\147\ See supra notes 103 and 108.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The proposed rule changes are based on the following rules of the
Nasdaq affiliated exchanges:
The Market Order proposal in Options 3, Section 7(a) will
be materially identical to BX's Market Orders in BX Options 3, Section
7(a)(5).
The ISO proposal in Options 3, Section 7(b)(5) will be
substantially similar to BX's ISO in BX Option 3, Section 7(a)(6).
Unlike BX, the Exchange's ISO proposal will not refer to how ISOs may
be entered on the Exchange as the Exchange intends address that in a
separate rule filing.
The Exchange's AON proposal will be substantially similar
to BX's Contingency Order rule in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(4)(A)
(except BX's rule also describes Minimum Quantity Orders, which the
Exchange does not offer today) and BX's AON rule in BX Options 3,
Section 7(a)(7).
[[Page 61415]]
The Stop Order proposal in Options 3, Section 7(d) will be
substantially similar to Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4), except Phlx
does not currently explicitly state that Phlx Stop Orders may only be
entered through FIX because Phlx only offers one order entry protocol
(FIX), unlike the Exchange, which offers two (FIX and OTTO).
The Stop Limit Order proposal in Options 3, Section 7(e)
will be substantially similar to Phlx Options 3, Section 7(b)(4)(A),
except Phlx does not currently explicitly state that Phlx Stop Limit
Orders may only be entered through FIX for the same reasons stated for
Stop Orders above.
The Preferenced Order proposal in Options 3, Section 7(l)
will be materially identical to Phlx's Directed Order rule in Phlx
Options 3, Section 7(b)(11).
The ALO proposal in Options 3, Section 7(n) will be
materially identical to BX ALOs in BX Options 3, Section 7(a)(12).
The Opening Sweep proposal in Options 3, Section 7(u) will
be materially identical to the Phlx Opening Sweep in Phlx Options 3,
Section 7(b)(6).
The Day order proposal in Supplementary Material .02(a) to
Options 3, Section 7 will be substantially similar to BX Options 3,
Section 7(b)(3), except BX's rule does not refer to OTTO because BX
does not offer OTTO functionality today.
The IOC proposal in Supplementary Material .02(d) to
Options 3, Section 7 will be substantially similar to BX's IOC in BX
Options 3, Section 7(b)(2), except the BX rule does not refer to OTTO
or Complex Order Price Protection as BX does not offer these features
today.
The OPG proposal in Supplementary Material .02(e) to
Options 3, Section 7 will be materially identical to BX's OPG in BX
Options 3, Section 7(b)(1).
The Opening Process proposal in Options 3, Section 8 to
allow all market participant interest to route will be identical to
BX's Opening Process in BX Options 3, Section 8.
The following proposed changes to PIM are based on BX
PRISM: (1) proposed Options 3, Section 13(b)(5) will be materially
identical to BX Options 3, Section 13(i)(E); (2) proposed Options 3,
Section 13(c)(3) will be materially identical to BX Options 3, Section
13(ii)(A)(8); (3) proposed Options 3, Section 13(d)(5) will be
functionally similar to BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(C); (4) proposed
Options 3, Section 13(d)(6) will be functionally similar to BX Options
3, Section 13(ii)(I); (5) proposed Options 3, Section 13(e)(4)(ii) will
be functionally similar to BX Options 3, Section 13(ii)(A)(8) with
respect to the ability to cancel or modify PIM responses (Improvement
Orders); and (6) proposed Supplementary Material .02 to Options 3,
Section 13 will be materially identical to BX Options 3, Section
13(iii).
The proposed OPP risk protection in Options 3, Section
15(a)(1)(A) will be functionally similar to BX OPP in BX Options 3,
Section 15(a)(1).\148\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\148\ As noted above, BX will file a separate rule change to
conform its OPP rule to the Exchange's proposed rule.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The proposed Post-Only Quote Configuration in Options 3,
Section 15(a)(3)(C) will be functionally identical to the BX Post-Only
Quote Configuration in BX Options 3, Section 15(c)(3).
The Depth of Market Feed proposal in Option 3, Section
23(a)(1) will be substantially similar to the BX Depth of Market Feed
in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), except the Exchange will not offer
auction and exposure notifications on its Depth of Market Feed like BX
does today.
The Order Feed proposal in Options 3, Section 23(a)(2)
will contain data elements that are identical to those on BX's Depth of
Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), specifically around what
would be provided in the opening/reopening order imbalance information
(i.e., the size of matched contracts and size of the imbalance), and
auction and exposure notifications.
The Top Feed proposal in Options 3, Section 23(a)(3) will
be substantially similar to the BX Top Feed in BX Options 3, Section
23(a)(2), except the Exchange will continue to provide aggregated size
information unlike BX.
The Spread Feed proposal in Options 3, Section 23(a)(5)
will contain full depth language that is substantially similar to BX's
Depth of Market Feed in BX Options 3, Section 23(a)(1), except the
proposed language in the Spread Feed will be tailored to complex
functionality.
The proposed optional quantity and notional value risk
protections in Options 3, Section 28 will be functionally identical to
the protections in BX Options 3, Section 28.\149\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\149\ As noted above, while the proposed rule text in Options 3,
Section 28 adds more granularity, including around how orders are
rejected when the value thresholds for the options risk protections
are exceeded, the Exchange understands that the BX optional risk
protections operate in the same manner.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Exchange reiterates that the proposed rule change is being
proposed in the context of the technology migration to enhanced Nasdaq
functionality. The Exchange further believes the proposed rule change
will benefit Members by providing a more consistent technology
offering, as well as consistent rules, for market participants on the
Nasdaq affiliated options exchanges. In addition, the proposed rule
change relates to adding clarity and consistency in the Exchange's
Rulebook, and are designed to reduce any potential investor confusion
as to the features and applicability of certain functionality presently
available on the Exchange.
The Exchange does not believe that the proposed rule change will
impose any burden on intra-market competition that is not necessary or
appropriate in furtherance of the purposes of the Act, as the majority
of the proposed changes will apply to all Members. As it relates to the
proposed rule change relating to bulk message functionality, while the
Exchange currently offers this functionality to Market Makers only,
bulk messaging is intended to provide Market Makers with an additional
tool to meet their various quoting obligations in a manner they deem
appropriate. As such, the Exchange believes that this functionality may
facilitate Market Makers' provision of liquidity, thereby benefiting
all market participants through additional execution opportunities at
potentially improved prices. Furthermore, while the Exchange will offer
the proposed Post-Only Quote Configuration to Market Makers only, the
proposed risk protection will enhance the ability of Market Makers to
add liquidity and avoid removing liquidity from the Exchange's order
book in the manner described above. Greater liquidity benefits all
market participants by providing more trading opportunities and
attracting greater participation by Market Makers. The Exchange also
does not believe that the proposed decommission of the GUI Kill Switch
for order cancellation will impose any burden on intra-market
competition that is not necessary or appropriate in furtherance of the
purposes of the Act. As discussed above, the Exchange previously
amended its rules to decommission the quote removal Kill Switch that
was available to Market Makers through the GUI.\150\ The Exchange
therefore believes that eliminating the GUI Kill Switch for order
cancellation will streamline the Exchange's risk protection offerings
in a manner that reflects Member use. The Exchange will continue to
offer substantially similar Kill Switch functionality through FIX and
OTTO.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\150\ See supra note 99.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61416]]
C. Self-Regulatory Organization's Statement on Comments on the Proposed
Rule Change Received From Members, Participants, or Others
No written comments were either solicited or received.
III. Date of Effectiveness of the Proposed Rule Change and Timing for
Commission Action
Because the foregoing proposed rule change does not: (i)
significantly affect the protection of investors or the public
interest; (ii) impose any significant burden on competition; and (iii)
become operative for 30 days from the date on which it was filed, or
such shorter time as the Commission may designate, it has become
effective pursuant to Section 19(b)(3)(A)(iii) of the Act \151\ and
subparagraph (f)(6) of Rule 19b-4 thereunder.\152\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\151\ 15 U.S.C. 78s(b)(3)(A)(iii).
\152\ 17 CFR 240.19b-4(f)(6). In addition, Rule 19b-4(f)(6)
requires a self-regulatory organization to give the Commission
written notice of its intent to file the proposed rule change at
least five business days prior to the date of filing of the proposed
rule change, or such shorter time as designated by the Commission.
The Exchange has satisfied this requirement.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
At any time within 60 days of the filing of the proposed rule
change, the Commission summarily may temporarily suspend such rule
change if it appears to the Commission that such action is necessary or
appropriate in the public interest, for the protection of investors, or
otherwise in furtherance of the purposes of the Act. If the Commission
takes such action, the Commission shall institute proceedings to
determine whether the proposed rule should be approved or disapproved.
IV. Solicitation of Comments
Interested persons are invited to submit written data, views, and
arguments concerning the foregoing, including whether the proposed rule
change is consistent with the Act. Comments may be submitted by any of
the following methods:
Electronic Comments
Use the Commission's internet comment form (https://www.sec.gov/rules/sro.shtml); or
Send an email to [email protected]. Please include
File Number SR-MRX-2022-18 on the subject line.
Paper Comments
Send paper comments in triplicate to Secretary, Securities
and Exchange Commission, 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC 20549-1090.
All submissions should refer to File Number SR-MRX-2022-18. This file
number should be included on the subject line if email is used. To help
the Commission process and review your comments more efficiently,
please use only one method. The Commission will post all comments on
the Commission's internet website (https://www.sec.gov/rules/sro.shtml).
Copies of the submission, all subsequent amendments, all written
statements with respect to the proposed rule change that are filed with
the Commission, and all written communications relating to the proposed
rule change between the Commission and any person, other than those
that may be withheld from the public in accordance with the provisions
of 5 U.S.C. 552, will be available for website viewing and printing in
the Commission's Public Reference Room, 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC
20549, on official business days between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and
3:00 p.m. Copies of the filing also will be available for inspection
and copying at the principal office of the Exchange. All comments
received will be posted without change. Persons submitting comments are
cautioned that we do not redact or edit personal identifying
information from comment submissions. You should submit only
information that you wish to make available publicly. All submissions
should refer to File Number SR-MRX-2022-18 and should be submitted on
or before November 1, 2022.
For the Commission, by the Division of Trading and Markets,
pursuant to delegated authority.\153\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\153\ 17 CFR 200.30-3(a)(12).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
J. Matthew DeLesDernier,
Deputy Secretary.
[FR Doc. 2022-21984 Filed 10-7-22; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 8011-01-P